JP6774246B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a game called pachislot, which is provided with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols provided on their respective surfaces, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as a medal or coin is inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is rotated. Output a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. To do. The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reels. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a game machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all reels is stopped and the combination of symbols related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the payout of the game medium (medals, etc.) and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of paying out game media can be mentioned.

Further, conventionally, in a gaming machine having the above configuration, it is known that a display unit for displaying an image is used to notify a player of a gaming situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a function of navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, that is, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) function. Then, the effect of notifying the fact that the number of times of navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination has been added by the change of the number displayed on the liquid crystal display device is performed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-30102

However, there is room for further improvement in the effect of notifying the player of the game situation by using the display unit for displaying an image, and an effect of enhancing the visual effect is desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to enhance the visual effect of an effect of notifying a game situation by using a display device and suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. Is to provide the technology that is possible.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) is provided.
When a privilege (for example, the number of additional games of ART described later) is given to the player, an expansion image (for example, an expansion target image 371 described later) that expands in a predetermined direction from the initial dimensions based on the operation of the player is displayed. It is possible to execute the expansion effect displayed on the display unit.
The expansion image is a gaming machine characterized in that the expansion rate differs depending on the size or type of privilege given to the player , and the expansion direction can be selected by the player.

In the present invention having the above configuration, since the expansion rate of the expansion image differs depending on the size or type of the privilege, it is possible to enhance the visual effect of the effect of notifying the game situation by using the display device, which is a hobby of the game. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

It is explanatory drawing explaining the functional flow in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance composition example in the game machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It shows the internal structure in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention, and is the perspective view in the state which the front door is opened. It is a top view which shows the display device in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the touch sensor module attached to the display device in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the front door in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the control system in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the main control circuit in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the auxiliary control circuit in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the touch sensor relay circuit in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus operation time table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the RT transition table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for a general gaming state in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT4 gaming state in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for a bonus in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 1) for small combination / replay in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 2) for small combination / replay in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 3) for small combination / replay in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 4) for small combination / replay in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for rotating cylinder stop in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table (the 1) in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table (the 2) in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 1st stop at the time of a forward push in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of forward push in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of a forward push in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the irregular push stop table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table selection table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the game lock lottery table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol correspondence winning operation flag data table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority data storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the RT state of the game machine in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination and the stop order in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination, the stop order, and RT transition in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the CZ (chance zone) lottery table of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in additional lottery table in CZ (chance zone) of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in occurrence lottery table in CZ (chance zone) of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus lottery table of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table which adds the G number in BB of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table in BB of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BR lottery table in BB of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BR1 continuous lottery table of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BR2 continuous lottery table of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional addition lottery table in BR of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional addition and promotion lottery table in BR of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional game number lottery table for additional addition A of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition game number lottery table for the additional addition B of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition game number lottery table for additional addition C of a game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 1) of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 2) of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 3) of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 4) of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 5) of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 6) of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (7) of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 8) of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (9) of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the provisional causal value lottery table of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal point lottery table of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value stock lottery table of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operating condition table of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub-storage area of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the processing example of the main control circuit of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery value change processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game lock lottery processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock processing at the start of a game in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order storage process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority table selection process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sliding piece number determination processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 2nd and 3rd stop processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line change bit check process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line mask data change processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority pull-in control processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change process after the 2nd stop in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of RT control processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus end check processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus operation check processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interrupt process by the control of a main CPU in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect content determination process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of receiving a start command in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pseudo-bonus processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing in ART in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing in ART in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of BR continuation processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of BR continuation determination in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the normal process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the causal value-related processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in preparation in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the precursor check processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect lottery processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of receiving a reel stop command in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the non-operation command reception processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification effect of the addition game number of ART using the touch input part in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the selection effect of the addition game number of ART using the touch input part in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the selection effect of the addition game number of ART using the touch input part in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the use example (the 1) of the mobile terminal cooperation function in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the use example (the 2) of the mobile terminal cooperation function in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the use example (the 3) of the mobile terminal cooperation function in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the use example (the 4) of the mobile terminal cooperation function in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the use example (the 5) of the mobile terminal cooperation function in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the use example (the 6) of the mobile terminal cooperation function in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the use example (the 7) of the mobile terminal cooperation function in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the use example (the 8) of the mobile terminal cooperation function in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the use example (9) of the mobile terminal cooperation function in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the use example (10) of the mobile terminal cooperation function in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the use example (11) of the mobile terminal cooperation function in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the use example (12) of the mobile terminal cooperation function in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the use example (13) of the mobile terminal cooperation function in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the use example (14) of the mobile terminal cooperation function in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the use example (15) of the mobile terminal cooperation function in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock processing at the start of a game in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the front door in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state suggestion touch effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the display object in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention, and the presence / absence of the response effect according to the state suggestion accuracy. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the state suggestion accuracy and the appearance magnification which are predetermined according to the suggestion state in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the state suggestion accuracy and the appearance probability and the degree of expectation which are predetermined according to the suggestion state in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suction effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suction effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suction effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display method of the image of the suction effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display method of the image of the suction effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display method of the image of the suction effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement route of the suction target display of the suction effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement route of the suction target display of the suction effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the enlarged effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the enlarged effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the announcement BGM selection effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the announcement BGM selection effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the announcement BGM selection effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the expansion effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the input determination area of the expansion effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which expands the expansion target image of the expansion effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which expanded the expansion target image of the expansion effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention to the left side to the limit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which expanded the expansion target image of the expansion effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention to the right side to the limit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the expansion width of the expansion target image of the expansion effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention, and the number of addition games of ART. It is a graph which shows the relationship between the expansion width of the expansion target image of the expansion effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention, and the number of addition games of ART. It is explanatory drawing which shows the visibility reduction efficiency centering on the touch coordinate which concerns on the scratch effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change of the visibility reduction efficiency which concerns on the scratch effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the scratch effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the scratch effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the scratch effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the scratch effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the scratch effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the scratch effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the scratch effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the addition notification effect in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st modification of the addition notification effect in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd modification of the addition notification effect in the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention.

1. First Embodiment Hereinafter, a pachislot machine, which is a gaming machine showing the first embodiment of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 116. In this embodiment, the assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT"), which is a function for navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, and the winning probability of replay when a specific symbol combination is displayed are calculated. A pachi-slot machine having an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) function in which a function in which a replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”), which is a gaming state higher than the normal time is operated, is activated at the same time will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium.

When a medal is inserted by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. The main control circuit described later is responsible for this internal lottery means. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the valid line (winning determination line) described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, re-game operation, and bonus operation are given to the player, and those related to other so-called "loss". Is provided.

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is carried by a main control circuit described later.

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". When the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for 1 symbol.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols to the effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (4 frames of the symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along the line. Further, the reel stop control means is specified for one or more reels, for example, when the challenge bonus (CB) which is a second type special accessory and the middle bonus (MB) which continuously operates the CB are operated. Within the time 75 msec (for one symbol), the rotation of the reel is stopped so that the combination of the symbols is displayed as much as possible along the effective line. Further, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the effective line. Let me.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line is related to winning. The main control circuit described later is responsible for the winning determination means. When it is determined by the winning determination means that the prize is related to the prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a medal. In pachislot, the above series of flows is performed as one game.

Further, in pachislot, in the series of flows described above, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is used. Various productions are performed.

When the start lever is operated, a random value for effect (hereinafter, random value for effect) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines by lottery what to execute this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. A sub-control circuit, which will be described later, is responsible for determining the content of the effect.

When the content of the effect is determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. In this way, in pachislot, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the player has an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at). It is provided and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet 2a. Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one side handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess that the carrier can handle when transporting the pachi-slot machine 1. The cabinet 2a is referred to as a "fixed frame", the front door 2b is referred to as a "door body", and the exterior body 2 is sometimes referred to as being composed of the "fixed frame" and the "door body".

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided in a horizontal row. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will also be referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, and a liquid crystal display device 11 showing a specific example of the display device. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable by using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachislot machine 1.

The liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9, and performs an effect by displaying an image. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes three display windows 4L (left display window), 4C (middle display window), and 4R (right display window) that display the patterns drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, respectively. A display unit (display screen) 11a including a display window unit 4 is provided. In the present embodiment, the image is displayed and the effect is executed by using the entire display unit 11a including the display window unit 4. The liquid crystal display device 11 shows a specific example of the display device according to the present invention.

Each display window is formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. The three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions that overlap with the arrangement areas of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and are in front of the three reels (game). It is provided so as to be located on the person side). Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window portion 4 through the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are continuously arranged among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reels provided behind them is stopped. It is set to a size that can display one symbol. That is, in the frame of each display window, each area of the upper stage, the middle stage, and the lower stage on which the symbol of the corresponding reel is displayed is provided, and one symbol is displayed in each area. Then, in the present embodiment, the line connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L (display window 4L), the middle region of the middle reel 3C (display window 4C), and the middle region of the right reel 3R (display window 4R) is won. It is defined as an effective line for determining whether or not.

The front panel 10 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9, and its size is set to cover the liquid crystal display device 11. The front panel 10 is arranged so as to be superimposed on the display unit 11a side of the liquid crystal display device 11, and is formed with a decorative frame 100 in which two panel openings 100a and 100b for exposing the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 are formed. It has a transparent protective cover (not shown) that closes the panel openings 100a and 100b of the decorative frame 100.

The decorative frame 100 has a partition piece 112 provided at the boundary between the panel opening 100a and the panel opening 100b. That is, the two panel openings 100a and 100b are partitioned by the partition pieces 112 so as to be arranged in the vertical direction. The panel opening 100a of the decorative frame 100 exposes the display portion 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11. Further, the panel opening 100b of the decorative frame 100 exposes the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

The decorative frame 100 is provided with an LED (Light Emitting Diode) group 21 and a decorative unit 121. The LED group 21 turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the content of the effect. The movable decorative unit 121 is arranged on the right side of the panel opening 100a in the decorative frame 100, and has an LED (Light Emitting Diode) (not shown). The movable decoration unit 121 lights up in a color and a light emitting pattern corresponding to the content of the effect when a special effect or a predetermined effect is performed.

A pedestal portion 12 is formed in the center of the door body 9. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with various devices (medal insertion slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1 bet button 15, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) to be operated by the player.

The medal slot 13 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 13 are used for one game up to a preset number of medals (for example, 3), and the amount exceeding the preset number is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Can be done (so-called credit function).

The MAX bet button 14 and the 1-bet button 15 are provided to determine the number of medals to be used in one game from the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. This checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

Further, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 23 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The 7-segment display 23 provides information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of medals to be paid out), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. Is displayed digitally.

A medal payout outlet 18, a medal tray 19, speakers 20L, 20R, and the like are provided at the lower part of the door body 9. The medal payout outlet 18 guides the medals discharged by driving the medal payout device 43, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 19 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 18. Further, the speakers 20L and 20R output sound effects such as sound effects and music corresponding to the content of the production.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1.

The cabinet 2a has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with one side open on the front side. A main control board 41 constituting the main control circuit 91 is provided in the upper part of the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls the main operations of the game in the pachislot machine 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later.

Three reels (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R) are provided in the central portion of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 3, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. The three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the stepping motor show a specific example of the fluctuation display device according to the present invention.

A medal payout device 43 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device 43) having a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one is provided in the lower portion of the cabinet 2a. On the left side of the hopper device 43 (on the left side when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front) in the cabinet 2a, a power supply device 44 that supplies necessary power to each device of the pachislot machine 1 is provided.

Further, a medal auxiliary storage 45 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 43 (on the right side when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front) in the cabinet 2a. The medal auxiliary storage 45 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 43. The medal auxiliary storage 45 is engaged with the bottom surface of the cabinet 2a and is detachably attached to the cabinet 2a.

A sub-control board 42 constituting a sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9) described later is provided on the upper portion of the front door 2b on the back surface side (the portion opposite to the display screen side). The sub-control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 101 will be described later.

Further, a selector 46 is provided at a substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 46 is a device for selecting whether or not the material, shape, and the like of medals inserted from the outside are appropriate via the medal insertion slot 13, and guides the medals determined to be appropriate to the hopper device 43. Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, a medal sensor for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 46. This medal sensor shows a specific example of the insertion operation detecting means according to the present invention.

[Display device and touch sensor module]
Next, the configuration of the liquid crystal display device 11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the liquid crystal display device 11.

As shown in FIG. 4, the liquid crystal display device 11 has a display unit 11a and a frame portion 11b that surrounds the display unit 11a. The surface shape of the display unit 11a is a horizontally long rectangle, and the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R described above are provided at the lower part of the rectangular surface of the display unit 11a. The frame portion 11b is provided so as to surround the four sides of the display portion 11a.

A touch sensor module 31 is arranged on one side of the display window 4R (the side opposite to the display window 4C side) of the display unit 11a. That is, the touch sensor module 31 is arranged near the lower right corner in the rectangular surface of the display unit 11a. When the front panel 10 has a transparent or semi-transparent cover that covers the display unit 11a, the touch sensor module 31 is placed on the surface of the transparent or translucent cover that faces the display unit 11a. It may be arranged in an area facing the vicinity of the lower right corner.

FIG. 5 is a plan view of the touch sensor module 31. The touch sensor module 31 of the present embodiment is a surface-type capacitance type touch sensor, and as shown in FIG. 5, a sensor unit 32, a flexible printed circuit board 33, and a touch sensor IC (Integrated Circuit) 34 are provided. Be prepared.

The sensor unit 32 is composed of a plate-shaped sensor having a vertically long rectangular surface shape. The sensor unit 32 includes a transparent substrate 35 having a rectangular surface 35a, electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c and transparent conductive films provided on one surface 35a of the transparent substrate 35, and electrode patterns 36a, 36b, It has 36c and a protective cover (not shown) provided so as to cover the transparent conductive film. Examples of the material for forming the transparent substrate 35 include glass and the like. The protective cover is made of a transparent material.

The electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c are arranged on the outer edge of the transparent substrate 35, and the transparent conductive film is formed on the surface 35a of the transparent substrate 35 in a region surrounded by the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c. To. Then, the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c are electrically connected to the transparent conductive film.

The electrode pattern 36a is composed of an electrode film having a substantially T-shaped film surface. Specifically, the electrode pattern 36a extends from one side side portion (long side portion on the side not facing the display window 4R) of the transparent substrate 35 and an extending portion extending from the center of the extending portion. It is composed of a protruding portion protruding toward the flexible printed circuit board 33 side. Then, the protruding portion of the electrode pattern 36a is electrically connected to the flexible printed circuit board 33.

The electrode pattern 36b is composed of an electrode film having a substantially L-shaped film surface. Specifically, the electrode pattern 36b is formed in the vicinity of the lower side extending portion extending along the lower side portion of the transparent substrate 35 and the protruding portion of the electrode pattern 36a from the end portion of the lower side extending portion on the lexible printed circuit board 33 side. It is composed of a side extending portion extending along one side side portion of the transparent substrate 35 to the position (position not contacting the protruding portion). The side extending portion of the electrode pattern 36b is arranged on the flexible printed circuit board 33 side of the extending portion of the electrode pattern 36a, and the side extending portion of the electrode pattern 36b and the extending portion of the electrode pattern 36a are shown in FIG. As shown in 4, it is arranged at a position overlapping a part of the right side portion of the frame portion 11b (a position facing a part of the right side portion of the frame portion 11b in the film thickness direction) in the forming surface. Further, the lower side extending portion of the electrode pattern 36b is arranged at a position overlapping a part of the lower side portion of the frame portion 11b in the forming surface thereof. Then, the tip of the side extending portion of the electrode pattern 36b is electrically connected to the flexible printed circuit board 33.

The electrode pattern 36c is composed of an electrode film having a substantially L-shaped film surface. Specifically, the electrode pattern 36c is formed in the vicinity of the upper side extending portion extending along the upper side portion of the transparent substrate 35 and the protruding portion of the electrode pattern 36a from the end portion of the upper side extending portion on the lexible printed circuit board 33 side. It is composed of a side extending portion extending along one side side portion of the transparent substrate 35 to the position (position not contacting the protruding portion). The side extending portion of the electrode pattern 36c is arranged on the flexible printed circuit board 33 side of the extending portion of the electrode pattern 36a, and the side extending portion of the electrode pattern 36c and the extending portion of the electrode pattern 36a are the extending portions thereof. In the forming surface, it is arranged at a position overlapping a part of the right side portion of the frame portion 11b (a position facing a part of the right side portion of the frame portion 11b in the film thickness direction). Then, the tip of the side extending portion of the electrode pattern 36c is electrically connected to the flexible printed circuit board 33.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, no electrode is provided on the other side side portion (long side portion facing the display window 4R) of the transparent substrate 35.

The flexible printed circuit board 33 is connected to one side end portion (long side end portion on the side not facing the display window 4R) of the transparent substrate 35, and has a connector 33a. The connector 33a is connected to a touch sensor relay board 73 (see FIG. 7 described later) described later. The electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c are electrically connected to the flexible printed circuit board 33. Further, the touch sensor IC 34 is mounted on the flexible printed circuit board 33.

A uniform electric field is generated on the surface 35a of the transparent substrate 35 in the sensor unit 32, and when a finger touches the surface 35a (protective cover) of the transparent substrate 35, the state (distribution) of the electric field on the surface 35a changes. Change. As a result, a weak current flows through each of the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c, and each current is output to the touch sensor IC34. The touch sensor IC 34 detects the position touched by the finger based on the value of the current input from each of the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c.

FIG. 6 is a plan view of the front door 2b as viewed from the front (player side). As shown in FIG. 6, the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 is exposed at the openings 100a and 100b of the front panel 10. The touch sensor module 31 is arranged on one side of the display window 4R in the display unit 11a (on the right side in the example shown in FIG. 6). As a result, a touch input unit 31a using the touch sensor module 31 is configured on one side of the display window 4R of the display unit 11a.

As described above, the electrode patterns 36a and 36b formed in the sensor portion 32 (see FIG. 5) of the touch sensor module 31 overlap with a part of the frame portion 11b in the electrode forming surface (in the film thickness direction). It is arranged at a position facing a part of the frame portion 11b). That is, the electrode patterns 36a and 36b are covered with the front panel 10 when viewed from the front (player side). Further, as described above, the side extending portion extending along one side portion of the transparent substrate 35 of the electrode pattern 36c overlaps with a part of the frame portion 11b in the electrode forming surface (film). It is arranged at a position facing a part of the frame portion 11b in the thickness direction). Further, the upper side extending portion extending along the upper side portion of the transparent substrate 35 of the electrode pattern 36c is a position overlapping the frame portion 11b in the electrode forming surface (a position facing the frame portion 11b in the film thickness direction). Although not arranged in, it is covered by the partition piece 112 of the front panel 10.

That is, the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c are covered with the front panel 10 when viewed from the front (player side). Further, no electrode pattern is formed on the side side portion (left side portion) of the display window 4R of the sensor unit 32 in the touch sensor module 31.

As a result, the electrode pattern of the touch sensor module 31 can be prevented from appearing at the boundary between the region where the touch input unit 31a is provided and the region where the touch input unit 31a is not provided. As a result, the boundary between the area where the touch input unit 31a is provided and the area where the touch input unit 31a is not provided can be made invisible to the player.

<Control system of pachislot>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 41 arranged in the cabinet 2a and a sub control board 42 arranged in the front door 2b. The reel relay terminal board 51, the setting key type switch 52, the cabinet side relay board 53, the door relay terminal board 54, and the power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44 are electrically connected to the main control board 41. The door.

The reel relay terminal plate 51 is arranged inside the reel body of each reel. The reel relay terminal plate 51 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel, and relays a signal output from the main control board 41 to the stepping motor. The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachi-slot 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1.

The external centralized terminal plate 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are electrically connected to the cabinet-side relay board 53. The cabinet-side relay board 53 relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the external centralized terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57, respectively. That is, the external centralized terminal plate 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 41 via the cabinet-side relay board 53.

The external centralized terminal plate 56 is attached to the cabinet 2a and is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. Since the hopper device 43 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 penetrates the medal auxiliary storage 45. The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 45 is full of medals.

A power switch 44a is connected to the power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44. The power switch 44a is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1.

A medal sensor (not shown), a door open / close monitoring switch 61, a BET switch 62, a settlement switch 63, a start switch 64, a stop switch board 65, a game operation display board 66, and a sub relay board 67 are connected to the door relay terminal board 54. Will be done. That is, the medal sensor, the door open / close monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the settlement switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, and the sub relay board 67 are mainly controlled via the door relay terminal board 54. It is connected to the board 41.

The medal sensor detects that the medal has passed through the selector 46, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The door open / close monitoring switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The BET switch 62 detects that the MAX bet button 14 and the 1BET button 15 (see FIG. 2) have been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

The settlement switch 63 detects that the settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 shows a specific example of the start operation detecting means according to the present invention.

The stop switch board 65 includes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoptable reel by an LED or the like. Therefore, a stop switch is provided on the stop switch board 65. The stop switch is a specific example of the stop operation detecting means according to the present invention, and detects that the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 23 when receiving the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable and when the game is replayed. It is a substrate for making it. Therefore, the 7-segment display 23 and the LED 69 are connected to the game operation display board 66. The LED 69, for example, lights a mark indicating the start of the game, a mark for replaying the game, and the like.

The sub-relay board 67 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 42 and the main control board 41. Further, the sub-relay board 67 is a board that relays connection wiring between the sub-control board 42 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub-control board 42. That is, the sub-control board 42, the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the touch sensor relay board 73, and the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 are electrically connected to the sub-relay board 67.

The sub-control board 42 is connected to the main control board 41 via the door relay terminal board 54 and the sub-relay board 67. Further, the sub-control board 42 is electrically connected to the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the touch sensor relay board 73, and the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 via the sub-relay board 67. ..

The sound I / O board 71 outputs audio to the speakers 20L and 20R. The LED board 72 emits the LED group 21 showing a specific example of the light source to display the blinking pattern according to the effect content executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9 described later).

The touch sensor relay board 73 transmits the input information regarding the touch operation output from the touch sensor module 31 to the sub-control circuit 101. The circuit configuration of the touch sensor relay board 73 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 stores the open / close history information of the front door 2b. Further, when the front door 2b is opened, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 outputs a signal for displaying an error to the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 42 (sub control circuit 101).

The ROM cartridge board 76 and the liquid crystal relay board 77 are connected to the sub-control board 42. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 is a substrate for managing image (video), audio, light (LED group 21), and communication data for production. The liquid crystal relay board 77 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 42 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 91 mounted on the main control board 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

The main control circuit 91 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 92 mounted on the main control board 41. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by executing the control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motor of each reel after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index includes, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position on each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit due to rotation of each reel. It is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is basically set for four symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L displayed in the middle area of the display window 4L and each symbol within the range up to the symbol four ahead of the symbol are displayed on the display window 4L. It becomes a symbol that can be stopped in the middle area.

<Sub-control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the sub-control circuit 101 mounted on the sub-control board 42 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub-control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 76 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge board 76 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

The control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91, and an effect registration task for extracting an effect random value and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Contains various programs to execute. Further, the control program includes a drawing control task that controls the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2) based on the determined effect content, and a lamp control task that controls the output of light by a light source such as the LED group 21. Also included are various programs for executing voice control tasks such as controlling sound output by the speakers 20L and 20R.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. The data storage area also includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like.

The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 20L and 20R to output sounds such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 21 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

<Touch sensor relay circuit>
Next, the configuration of the touch sensor relay circuit 151 mounted on the touch sensor relay board 73 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the touch sensor relay circuit 151. As shown in FIG. 10, the touch sensor relay circuit 151 is electrically connected to the sub-relay board 67 and the touch sensor module 31. The touch sensor relay circuit 151 determines the operation command and the XY coordinate data based on the touch input information and the operation XY coordinate data supplied from the touch sensor module 31, and transmits the operation command and the XY coordinate data to the sub control circuit 101 via the sub relay board 67. To do.

The touch sensor relay circuit 151 basically includes a touch sensor LSI (Large Scale Integration) 152, connectors 153, 154, regulators 155, 156, sub-control receive buffer 157, and sub-control transmit buffer 158.

A connector 154, a regulator 155, a sub-control reception buffer 157, and a sub-control transmission buffer 158 are connected to the touch sensor LSI 152. The sub-control receive buffer 157 is connected to the connector 153 and the regulator 155, and the sub-control transmit buffer 158 is connected to the connector 153 and the regulator 156.

The connector 153 is electrically connected to the connector 131 mounted on the sub-relay board 67. Further, the connector 154 is electrically connected to the above-mentioned connector 33a of the touch sensor module 31.

The sub-control board 42 and the sub-relay board 67 show a specific example of the effect control board according to the present invention, and the sub-control circuit 101 shows a specific example of the effect control circuit according to the present invention.

The regulator 155 converts the 12V DC voltage supplied through the connector 153 into a 3.3V DC voltage, and supplies the 3.3V DC voltage to the touch sensor LSI 152, the connector 154, and the sub-control reception buffer 157. To do. Further, the regulator 156 converts the 12V DC voltage supplied through the connector 153 into a 5V DC voltage, and supplies the 5V DC voltage to the sub-control transmission buffer 158.

The sub-control reception buffer 157 temporarily stores the transmission data from the sub-control circuit 101 received by the connector 153 as reception data (RXD). Then, the sub-control reception buffer 157 outputs the stored reception data to the touch sensor LSI 152.

The touch sensor LSI 152 represents the type of operation of the player with respect to the touch input unit 31a (see FIG. 6) of the touch sensor module 31 based on the touch input information supplied from the touch sensor module 31 via the connector 154. Determine various operation commands. Further, the touch sensor LSI 152 determines the XY coordinate data based on the operation XY coordinate data supplied from the touch sensor module 31.

The sub-control transmission buffer 158 stores various operation commands and XY coordinate data output from the touch sensor LSI 152. Then, the sub-control transmission buffer 158 transmits various stored operation commands and XY coordinate data as transmission data (TXD) to the sub-control circuit 101 via the connector 153.

In the present embodiment, in order for the touch sensor relay circuit 151 to determine the operation type and the XY coordinates based on the information regarding the player's touch operation output from the touch sensor module 31, the touch sensor module 31 performed by the sub-control circuit 101 Such processing can be reduced. As a result, the load on the sub-control circuit 101 in the pachi-slot machine 1 equipped with the touch sensor module 31 can be reduced.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 40.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data that specifies the position of each symbol in each rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 11). (Refer to the symbol code table)) and defines the correspondence with.

In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol arranged in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the display window portion 4 is defined as "0". Then, in each reel, "0" corresponding to the symbol counter corresponds to the rotation direction of the reels (direction from the symbol position "20" in FIG. 11 toward the symbol position "0") with reference to the symbol position "0". ~ "20" is assigned to each symbol as the symbol position.

That is, by referring to the values of the symbol counters (“0” to “20”) and the symbol arrangement table, they are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel in the frame of the display window portion 4. The type of symbol can be specified. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is "8", the upper, middle, and lower regions of the left reel 3L within the frame of the display window 4L have the symbol position "9" "9", respectively. The symbols corresponding to "watermelon", "red 7" at the symbol position "8", and "bell 1" at the symbol position "7" are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 15. The symbol combination table defines the correspondence between the combination of symbols determined in advance according to the type of privilege, the display combination (storage area), and the number of payouts.

In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table. It is judged as a prize. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals and operating the replay. If the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, a so-called "loss" occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "loss" is not specified in the symbol combination table, so that the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "loss" is specified. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "loss" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "loss".

The various data described in the display combination column in the symbol combination table are data for identifying the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line. The "data" in the display combination column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique combination of symbols (contents of the display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

Further, the data of the "storage area" in the display combination column is data for designating the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41 described later) in which the corresponding display combination is stored. In this embodiment, 25 display combination storage areas are provided. Then, in the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1 byte data pattern) and different contents are managed as different display combinations due to the difference in the "storage area".

The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the combination of symbols to which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the data of the "number of payouts", the same number of medals as the numerical value is paid out.

For example, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, when the number of medals inserted is three and any one of "C_13_BEL_A" to "C_13_BEL_AP" is determined as the display combination, 13 medals are inserted. The payout will be made. Further, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the number of medals inserted is three and any one of "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" is determined as the display combination, 14 medals are paid out. Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z", "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D", "C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E", which are display roles related to replay (replay) as display roles, "C_HOM_A"-"C_HOM_P", "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A"-"C_B_REP_P", "C_CU_REP_A", "C_CU_REP_B", "C_CD_REP_A"-"C_CD_REP_I"
When any of "A" to "C_Oyama_REP_F" and "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_C" is determined, the replay (replay) is activated.

It should be noted that the display combination related to "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" shown in FIG. 15 may be displayed when the display combination related to "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D" could not be established (missed). It's a role. The display combination related to these "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" is a display combination that serves as an opportunity when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state described later.

[Bonus activation table]
Next, the bonus operating table will be described with reference to FIG. When the bonus is activated, the bonus activation table is stored in the game status flag storage area (see FIG. 42 described later), the bonus end number counter, the game possible count counter, and the winning possible count counter provided in the main RAM 95. Specify the data to be used.

The game status flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game in which the operation is performed. In the present embodiment, a middle bonus and a challenge bonus are provided as the types of bonus games. The middle bonus is a so-called second-class special accessory continuous operation device, which is hereinafter referred to as "MB". The challenge bonus is a so-called type 2 special character, and is hereinafter referred to as "CB". During the operation period of "MB", the operation of "CB" is continuously performed.

The bonus end number counter is data for managing whether or not the number of medals to be paid out exceeds the specified number (payout number) that triggers the end of the bonus game. In the present embodiment, the operation of "MB1" and "MB2" started with the display of "C_MB1" or "C_MB2" ends when the medals exceeding the specified number "13" are paid out.

The playable number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games that can be played in the operation of the "CB", that is, the so-called playable number of times. The operation of "CB" ends when one game is played.

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table defines the correspondence between the transition condition of the RT gaming state and the RT gaming state of the transition source and the transition destination.

In the present embodiment, five types of RT game states are provided, from RT0 game state to RT4 game state, in which the types of internal winning combinations of replays and their winning probabilities are different from each other. Then, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the RT game is that the symbol combination related to the predetermined internal winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line (the predetermined display combination is established). It is a transition condition between states.

Specifically, when the display combinations related to "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_A", "C_CU_REP_A", and "C_CU_REP_B" are established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (RT gaming state before transition) is any one of RT0 gaming state, RT2 gaming state to RT4 gaming state.

Further, when the display combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state. The transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) in this case is any one of the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state.

Further, when the display combination related to "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z" and "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D" is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. The transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) in this case is any one of RT0 gaming state, RT2 gaming state, and RT4 gaming state.

Further, when the display combination related to "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_C" is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state. The transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) in this case is any of the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. And "C_
When the display combination related to "ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E" is established, the RT game state is RT.
Shift to 0 game state. The transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) in this case is any one of the RT1 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) controls the transition of the RT gaming state with reference to the RT transition table. For details of the transition flow of the RT gaming state, refer to the RT transition table. A more specific description will be given later with reference to FIG. 47.

[Internal lottery table decision table]
Next, the internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines the correspondence between the game state, the number of medals inserted, the internal lottery table, and the number of lottery.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the general gaming state (MB gaming state), the internal lottery table for the general gaming state is used, and "42" is set as the number of lottery. In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the MB (CB) gaming state, all the small winning combinations (internal winning combination related to the payout of medals) are determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the bits related to all the small winning combinations in the internal winning combination storage area described later are turned on. Further, when the gaming state is the MB (CB) gaming state, the winnings of "MB1" and "MB2" are invalidated.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the internal lottery table for the general gaming state is used even when the gaming state is the MB (CB) gaming state. The present invention is not limited to this, and the internal lottery table used when the gaming state is the MB (CB) gaming state is separate from the internal lottery table used when the gaming state is the general gaming state. It may be provided.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23. The internal lottery table defines the correspondence between the small win / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer associated with the winning numbers in each RT game state and the lottery value when each winning number is determined. ..

The small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are data acquired as a result of the lottery performed by referring to the internal lottery table, and are described later in the internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 24 to 28 described later). This is the data for designating the internal winning combination specified by.

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" are sequentially subtracted by lottery values defined according to each winning number. Then, an internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). In other words, it means that the winning number when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur) is won, and the data points assigned to the winning number are acquired.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data to which the lottery value is assigned (that is, the data pointer) is determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

FIG. 19 shows an internal lottery table (RT0) for a general gaming state. The internal lottery table (RT0) for the general game state is a table that is referred to when the RT game state is the RT0 game state, and corresponds to the lottery value assigned to each of the winning numbers 1 to 42 and the data pointer. Prescribe.

In the present embodiment, the lottery value is defined according to the settings 1 to 6. These settings 1 to 6 are provided for the game store to adjust the expected value of the internal winning such as a bonus or a small winning combination. For example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key type switch 52 are used. Be changed.

For example, with reference to the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general game state, the probability that the winning number "1" (abbreviated as "F_NMLRP1") is won in setting 6 is 7000/65536. Then, when the winning number "1" is won, "1" is acquired as a small winning combination / replay data pointer. The small combination / replay data pointer "1" corresponds to the internal winning combination related to the abbreviations "C_C_REP" and "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P" (see FIG. 26 described later).

Further, in the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general game state, the winning numbers "12" (abbreviation "F_R1_R2_KP"), "13" (abbreviation "F_R1_KP_R2"), "19" (abbreviation "F_KP_R4_R2_1") to "22" ( The lottery value of the abbreviation "F_KP_R2_R4_2") is "0". Therefore, when the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general game state is referred to, the winning numbers "12", "13", "19" to "22" are not won.

The small role / replay data pointers corresponding to the winning numbers "12", "13", "19" to "22" are "12", "13", "19" to "22", respectively. The internal winning combination common to the small winning combination / replay data pointer of is the internal winning combination related to the abbreviations “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” (see FIG. 26 described later). Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, the internal winning combination related to the abbreviations "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is not determined, and the RT0 gaming state does not shift to the RT2 gaming state.

FIG. 20 shows an internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state. The RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, and defines a lottery value and a data pointer corresponding to each of the winning numbers "1" to "24". When the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the lottery values defined for each of the winning numbers "1" to "24" in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (RT0) (see FIG. 19) are set. , RT1 The lottery value specified for each of the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal lottery table for the gaming state is changed.

For example, in the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers "19" and "21" are "3750", respectively. As described above, when any of the small winning combination / replay data pointers "19" to "22" specified in each of the winning numbers "19" to "22" is acquired, the abbreviations "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" are obtained. The internal winning combination related to "" is determined. Therefore, in the case of the RT1 game state, the abbreviation "C_CD_REP_A" ~
There is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_I" will be decided, and the RT game state is R.
It may shift from the T1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

FIG. 21 shows an internal lottery table for the RT2 gaming state. The RT2 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, and defines a lottery value and a data pointer corresponding to each of the winning numbers "1" to "24". When the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the lottery value defined for each of the winning numbers "1" to "24" in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (RT0) (see FIG. 19) is RT2. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value specified for each of the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal lottery table for the game state.

For example, in the RT2 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers "14" and "16" are "10000", respectively, and the lottery values of the winning numbers "15" and "17" are "6000", respectively. Is. The lottery value of the winning number "18" is "10846".

When any of the small winning combination / replay data pointers "14" to "18" specified according to the winning numbers "14" to "18" is acquired, the abbreviations "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z" and "C_SBB_A" are obtained. ~ Any of the internal winning combinations related to "C_SBB_D" is determined (see FIG. 25 described later). Therefore, when the RT game state is the RT2 game state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to the abbreviations "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z" and "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D" is determined, and the RT game state is RT2. It may shift from the gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

FIG. 22 shows an internal lottery table for the RT3 gaming state. The RT3 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, and defines a lottery value and a data pointer corresponding to each of the winning numbers "1" to "24". When the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the lottery value defined for each of the winning numbers "1" to "24" in the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is RT3. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value specified for each of the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal lottery table for the game state.

For example, in the RT3 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers "20" and "22" are "5000", respectively, and the lottery values of the winning numbers "23" and "24" are "8000", respectively. Is. When any of the small winning combination / replay data pointers "20" and "22" to "24" specified according to the winning numbers "20" and "22" to "24" is acquired, the abbreviation "C_" The internal winning combination related to "small V_REP_A" to "C_small V_REP_C" is commonly determined (see FIG. 26 described later). Therefore, in the case of the RT3 gaming state, there is a possibility that any of the internal winning combinations related to the abbreviations "C_small V_REP_A" to "C_small V_REP_C" is determined, and the RT gaming state is changed from the RT3 gaming state. It may shift to the RT4 game state.

In addition, when the small winning combination / replay data pointers "20" and "22" specified according to the winning numbers "20" and "22" are acquired, the internal winning combination related to the abbreviations "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is obtained. Are commonly determined (see FIG. 26 below). Therefore, in the case of the RT3 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to the abbreviations "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is commonly determined, and the RT gaming state shifts from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Sometimes.

FIG. 23 shows an internal lottery table for the RT4 gaming state. The internal lottery table for the RT4 game state is a table referred to in the RT4 game state, and defines a lottery value and a data pointer corresponding to each of the winning numbers "1" to "24". When the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state, the lottery value defined for each of the winning numbers "1" to "24" in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (RT0) (see FIG. 19) is RT4. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value specified for each of the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal lottery table for the game state.

For example, in the RT4 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers "12" and "13" are "13000", respectively. When the small winning combination / replay data pointers "12" and "13" specified according to the winning numbers "12" and "13" are acquired, the internal winning combination related to the abbreviations "C_CU_REP_A" and "C_CU_REP_B" is common. (See FIG. 26 described later). Therefore, when the RT game state is the RT4 game state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to the abbreviations "C_CU_REP_A" and "C_CU_REP_B" is determined, and the RT game state shifts from the RT4 game state to the RT1 game state. I have something to do.

In addition, when the small winning combination / replay data pointers "12" and "13" specified according to the winning numbers "12" and "13" are acquired, the internal winning combination related to the abbreviations "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is obtained. Are commonly determined (see FIG. 26 below). Therefore, when the RT game state is the RT4 game state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to the abbreviations "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is determined, and the RT game state shifts from the RT4 game state to the RT2 game state. I have something to do.

The winning numbers "28" to "33" in the internal lottery table (RT0) for the RT0 gaming state shown in FIG. 19 may be won in any of the gaming states of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, and are drawn. The values are "2930" respectively. When the small winning combination / replay data pointers "28" to "33" specified according to the winning numbers "28" to "33" are acquired, the internal winning combination related to the abbreviations "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" is common. (See FIG. 28, which will be described later).

Therefore, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to the abbreviations "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" may be determined in any of the gaming states from the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, regardless of whether the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, or the RT4 gaming state, the RT gaming state may shift to the RT0 gaming state.

[Internal winning combination decision table]
Next, the internal winning combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the internal winning combination. That is, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are determined, the internal winning combination is uniquely determined.

The "internal winning combination" in the internal winning combination determination table is for identifying a combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed along the effective line set over the display areas of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. It is the data of. The "internal winning combination" is represented by 1-byte data in the same manner as the "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 15, and is a symbol unique to each bit in the 1-byte data. Combinations are assigned. The "○" mark in the internal winning combination determination table indicates the internal winning combination to be won in the acquired data pointer.

When the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are "0", the content of the "internal winning combination" is "missing", which is the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 15. Indicates that the display of all symbol combinations specified by is not permitted.

FIG. 24 shows an internal winning combination determination table for bonuses. The bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game for "1" of the bonus data pointer. That is, the bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the bonus data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game. As shown in FIG. 24, for example, when "1" is acquired as the bonus data pointer, the internal winning combination related to the abbreviations "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" is won.

25 to 28 show an internal winning combination determination table for small combination / replay. The small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the small winning combination and the internal winning combination related to the replay (replay) for each of "1" to "42" of the small combination / replay data pointer. That is, the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the payout of medals or the internal winning combination related to the operation of the replay.

For example, when "17" is acquired as a data pointer for a small role / replay, the abbreviations "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z", "C_C_REP", "C_Oyama_REP_A" to "C_" are used as internal winning combinations. The internal winning combination related to "Oyama_REP_F" is duplicated. In addition, when "18" is acquired as a data pointer for a small role / replay, the abbreviations "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D", "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P", "C_" are used as internal winning combinations. The internal winning combinations related to "Koyama_REP_A" to "C_Koyama_REP_F" and "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_C" are duplicated.

[Number selection table for stopping rotation]
Next, the number selection table for stopping the rotation of the cylinder will be described with reference to FIG. 29. The rotation stop number selection table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the rotation stop number. The reel stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in the reel stop initial setting process described later.

The rotating cylinder stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines a different rotating cylinder stop number for each data pointer. For example, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "3", the rotation stop number "3" is selected. When the bonus data pointer is "1", the rotation stop number "67" is selected.

The rice mark 1 in the rotation stop number selection table shown in FIG. 29 is in the MB game state (CB game state), and the data pointer for the small role / replay is either "0" or "25 to 41". The correspondence between the data pointer and the rotation stop number in the case of is shown. In this case, the rotation stop number "42" is selected. Further, the rice marks 1 and 2 in the rotation cylinder stop number selection table shown in FIG. 29 indicate the correspondence between the data pointer and the rotation rotation stop number in the MB gaming state (CB gaming state). For example, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "1" during the MB game state, the rotation stop number "43" is selected.

The rotation stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines a different rotation stop number for each small combination / replay data pointer, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the rotation rotation stop number selection table according to the present invention, the same rotation rotation stop number may be specified for different small winning combination / replay data pointers to reduce data.

[Reel stop initialization table]
Next, the reel stop initial setting table will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. The reel stop initial setting table defines the correspondence between the reel stop number and various data used in the pull-in priority table selection process described later and the determination process of the number of sliding pieces of each reel described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes a rotation stop number, a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, and forward push. The correspondence between the initial table change data and the table selection data at the time of irregular pressing is specified.

The pull-in priority table selection table number and the pull-in priority table number are data used in the pull-in priority table selection process. For example, if the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the rotation stop number is specified in the reel stop initial setting table, the pull-in priority table number specified in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 37 described later) is used. Data related to the priority of the corresponding display combination can be acquired.

Further, if the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the turning cylinder stop number is not specified in the reel stop initial setting table, the pull-in priority table selection table (see FIG. 36 described later) is referred to and the pull-in priority is given. Table selection The pull-in priority table number corresponding to the table number is determined.

For the forward-pressed table selection data, forward-pressed table change data, and forward-pressed table change initial data, a stop table (see FIGS. 32 to 34 described later) to be referred to when forward-pressed is performed is specified. It is the data for. The "forward push" in the present embodiment is a stop operation when the first stop operation (the first stop operation performed) is performed on the left reel 3L, and specifically, "left middle". Corresponds to the pressing order of "right" and "left and right middle".

The irregular push table selection data is data for designating a stop table (see FIG. 35 described later) to be referred to when the irregular push is performed. The "irregular push" in the present embodiment is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and is a "middle left / right", "middle right / left", and "right middle". Corresponds to the pressing order of "left" and "right, left, middle".

In the present embodiment, basically, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the reel stop control is performed so that the rotation of the corresponding reel stops within 190 msec. Specifically, any one of the number of sliding pieces "0" to "4" is added to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected, and the value corresponds to the obtained value. The symbol position is determined as the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel stops (this is referred to as a "scheduled stop position"). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is started to be stopped, and this is referred to as a "stop start position".

That is, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the reel from the time when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch until the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped. In other words, it is the number of symbols that pass through the middle region of the corresponding reel of the corresponding display window in the period from the detection of the stop operation by the stop switch to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch.

With reference to the stop table, the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is tentative, and the acquired number of sliding pieces does not immediately determine the scheduled stop position of the reel.

Further, in the present embodiment, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces than the number of sliding pieces acquired based on the stop table described later (hereinafter referred to as “sliding piece number determination data”), the attraction priority will be described later. The number of sliding pieces is changed with reference to the table (see FIG. 37 described later). Then, the sliding piece number determination data is referred to for determining the search order when comparing the priorities of each symbol from the stop start position to the symbol position four ahead, which is the maximum number of sliding pieces.

In this embodiment, the stop table to be referred to is used properly according to the forward push and the irregular push. In the case of forward pressing, the first stop table for forward pressing (see FIG. 32 described later) and the second and third stop tables for forward pressing (see FIG. 34 described later) are referred to. On the other hand, in the case of irregular pressing, the stop table at the time of irregular pressing (see FIG. 35 described later) is referred to.

[Stop table for first stop when pressing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing will be described. The stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing shown in FIG. 32 is referred to when the table selection data at the time of forward pressing is “01”. The stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing defines the correspondence between the stop start positions "0" to "20" of the left reel 3L and the slip piece number determination data and the change status.

For example, if the stop start position of the left reel 3L is "15", the slip piece number determination data becomes "0" and the change status becomes "1". The change status is used when referring to the forward press control change table (see FIG. 33 described later) described later.

[Control change table when pressing forward]
Next, the control change table at the time of forward pressing will be described with reference to FIG. 33. The forward push control change table defines the correspondence between the change target position (the position where the left reel 3L is scheduled to stop), the change status, the change status, and the second and third stop table numbers for forward push.

For example, if the change status acquired based on the first stop table for forward pressing (see FIG. 32) is "1" and the planned stop position of the left reel 3L is "15", the change status is "15". It becomes "0", and the stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing becomes "12". If the change status and the stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward push are not registered in the target position in the control change table at the time of forward push, the stop table number is not changed.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop when pushing forward and stop table when pushing irregularly]
Next, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular pressing will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. The stop table for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity define 1 byte of stop data according to each of the symbol positions "0" to "20".

The second and third stop tables for forward pressing shown in FIG. 34 are referred to when the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing are "08". Further, the irregular pressing stop table shown in FIG. 35 is referred to when the irregular pressing table selection data is "07".

Is the stop data specified in each stop table of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity appropriate as the position where the symbol position associated with itself stops the rotation of the reel? Has information on whether or not. Then, this stop data provides information on whether or not the corresponding symbol position is appropriate as a position to stop the rotation of the reel, the bit corresponding to the "A line" column and the "B line" column in each stop table. Assign to the bit corresponding to. Further, the stop data is defined by assigning information on which of these two types of information should be adopted to the bits corresponding to the "line change" column in each stop table.

That is, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular time specify a plurality of methods for determining the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, the position where the reel rotation is stopped can be changed based on the stop position at the time of the first stop. By adopting such a configuration, information can be compressed.

The data for determining the number of sliding pieces is determined as follows. First, it is specified which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponds to bit 1) constituting the stop data is referred to according to the type of the stop button in which the stop operation is detected. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the column of "middle reel A line data" of bit 4 is specified.

Then, with reference to the designated bit string, each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces is sequentially searched for whether or not "1" is defined as the corresponding data. As a result of this search, the difference from the stop start position to the symbol position for which "1" is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and the difference is used as the sliding piece number determination data.

Whether or not to change the reference bit string from the "A line" column to the "B line" column is determined by referring to the "line change" column, and "1" is specified in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is determined by whether or not it has been done. Then, when it is determined to change the line, the column of "B line" is specified thereafter, and the above search is performed.

[Pull-in priority table selection table]
Next, the pull-in priority table selection table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the combination of the pull-in priority table selection table number and the stop button pressing order and the pull-in priority table number in each combination. The attraction priority table number is data for acquiring information regarding the priority of the display combination defined in the attraction priority table (see FIG. 37 described later).

When the left reel 3L is first stopped, the data in the "left reel first stop" column in the pull-in priority table selection table is referred to. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the attraction priority table selection table number is "1", "00" is acquired as the attraction priority table number. Then, even when the middle reel 3C is pressed at the second stop and the right reel 3R is pressed at the second stop, "00" is maintained as the pull-in priority table number.

If the pull-in priority table number is not registered at the target position in the pull-in priority table selection table, the number shown in the right column of the right reel first stop column is the pull-in priority table number. Is obtained as. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the attraction priority table selection table number is "0", the attraction priority table number is not registered at the target position. Therefore, in this case, the column on the right side of the column of the first stop of the right reel corresponding to the attraction priority table selection table number "0" is referred to, and "00" is acquired as the attraction priority table number.

[Pull-in priority table]
Next, the pull-in priority table will be described with reference to FIG. 37. The pull-in priority table defines the correspondence between the pull-in data for each storage area type in each of the pull-in priority table numbers "00" to "04" and the predetermined priority.

The pull-in priority table is used to search whether or not a more appropriate number of slip pieces exists in addition to the number of slip pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order of priority to be stopped and displayed (pulled in) among the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Further, each of the pull-in data is the same as the "internal winning combination" in the internal winning combination determination table shown in FIGS. 24 to 28 and the "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 15. It is represented by byte data, and a unique combination of symbols is assigned to each bit in the 1-byte data.

In the present embodiment, first, the number of slip pieces is acquired based on the above-mentioned first stop table for forward push (see FIG. 32). However, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. That is, in the present embodiment, the more appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined based on the priority of the combination of symbols that are allowed to be stopped by the internal winning combination, regardless of the number of sliding pieces acquired by the stop table.

In the present embodiment, the stop display (pull-in) of the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination having a higher priority has priority over the stop display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination having a lower priority. It is done in.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, not only the priority of the internal winning combination is different depending on the attraction priority table number, but also the number of priority divisions is different. Specifically, when the pull-in priority table numbers are "01", "03", and "04", the number of priority divisions is set to 3, and the pull-in priority table numbers are "00" and "02". If is, the number of priority divisions is set to 1.

Here, in order to simplify the explanation, the priority when the pull-in priority table number is "01" will be described, and the description of the priority in the other pull-in priority table numbers will be omitted. When the pull-in priority table number is "01", the priority "1" includes abbreviations "C_BAR_A", "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_3_BEL_B1" to "C_3_BEL_B8", and "C_3_BEL_C1" to "C_3_BEL_C1". The pull-in data corresponding to "" is specified.

The priority "2" when the pull-in priority table number is "01" corresponds to the abbreviations "C_BAR_B", "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_C", and "C_B_REP_H" to "C_B_REP_J". The pull-in data is specified.

The priority "3" when the pull-in priority table number is "01" includes abbreviations "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H", "C_BAR_C" to "C_BAR_E", "C_B_REP_D" to "C_B_REP_G", and "C_B_REP_K". The pull-in data corresponding to "C_B_REP_P" is defined.

[Search order table]
Next, the search sequence table will be described with reference to FIG. 38. The search order table is an order in which the number of sliding pieces is preferentially applied from a predetermined numerical range (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4) (hereinafter, “search”). "Order") is specified.

The search order table defines the slip piece number determination data obtained based on the above-mentioned stop table and the search order thereof. That is, in the present embodiment, the order of numerical values to be applied preferentially is determined based on the number of sliding pieces determination data. Further, the search order table is provided on the assumption that there are a plurality of sliding pieces having the same priority, and is configured to apply the one having a higher search order.

In this embodiment, as described in the priority pull-in control process of FIG. 93 described later, each numerical value is searched sequentially from the lower search order “5” of the search order table, and corresponds to the search order “1”. Priority is given to the number of sliding pieces from the numerical value to be applied.

[Game lock lottery table]
Next, the game lock lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 39. The game lock lottery table defines the correspondence between various winning numbers acquired by the internal lottery during the RT4 game state and the lottery value of the winning of the game lock. The game lock in the present embodiment is generated during the game. Specifically, when the start operation (the tilting operation of the start lever 16 by the player) is detected, the occurrence of the game lock is drawn, and when the occurrence of the game lock is determined, the game lock is generated. While the game lock is occurring, even if a throw-in operation or a stop operation is performed, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed.

In the game lock lottery process of the present embodiment, basically, a random number value for production (random number denominator = 65536) extracted from a predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is defined in the game lock lottery table. Subtract by the lottery value. Then, the lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). In other words, it means that the game lock is won when the result of the subtraction is less than 0.

In the game lock lottery table shown in FIG. 39, when the winning numbers are "36" (abbreviation "F_strong angle check") to "41" (abbreviation "F_reach eyes"), the lottery value of the game lock is Is regulated. That is, in the present embodiment, when the winning numbers are "33" to "41", a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the game lock. For example, when the winning number is "37" (abbreviated as "F_middle stage check"), the game lock is won (executed) with a probability of 32768/65536.

[Prize winning operation flag data table for symbols]
Next, the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table will be described with reference to FIG. 40. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the data of the internal winning combination that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the effective line. That is, by referring to the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table, it is possible to determine the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15).

For example, when the symbol "rip" is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the left reel 3L, it can be displayed in the storage areas 1 to 25 corresponding to the symbol code "00000001" (rip) in the reel type "left". "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the internal winning combination. The data defined in the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is logically producted and stored in the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45 described later) described later.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 46. Although description is omitted here (not shown), a storage area for various control data, various flags, various counters, etc. used in the above-mentioned various reel effects is also provided in the main RAM 95.

[Display combination storage area, internal winning combination storage area, and carry-over combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the present embodiment, each display combination storage area is composed of display combination storage areas 1 to 25 represented by 1 byte of data.

In each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 25, when "1" is set in a predetermined bit (when it is stored), the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the valid line. Is shown. On the other hand, when all the bits are "0", it indicates that the combination of symbols related to the winning is not displayed on the valid line.

Further, the main RAM 95 is provided with an internal winning combination storage area (not shown). The internal winning combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area shown in FIG. 41. When "1" is set in a plurality of bits in the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 25, the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to each bit is permitted. Further, when all the bits are "0", the content of the internal winning combination is "missing".

Further, the main RAM 95 is provided with a carry-over combination storage area (not shown). The carry-over combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area 1 shown in FIG. As a result of the internal lottery, when "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" are determined as the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area as the carry-over combination. The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is not cleared until the corresponding symbol combination (for example, "rip"-"lip"-"bell 2" of "C_MB1") is displayed on the valid line. Be retained. Then, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the carry-over combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 42. Each of the game state flag storage areas is composed of game state flag storage areas 1 and 2 represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the game state flag, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2.

When "1" is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit in each of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2, the bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. Is shown. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 1, MB ("C_MB1" or "C_MB2") is being operated, and the game state is the MB game state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 43. The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 93 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Press order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The press order storage area stores a press order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, each bit is assigned the type of pressing order of the stop button. For example, when the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left middle right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 45. In the symbol code storage area, the symbol code (symbol code storage area 1) of the reel that has been stopped most recently and the displayable combination (symbol code storage areas 2 to 26) are stored for each effective line. Reel. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination is stored in the symbol code storage areas 2 to 26.

In the present embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 40), and the winning operation flag is read. The data is logically producted with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the logically stacked data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 45. When a plurality of effective lines are provided, the same number of symbol code storage areas as the number of effective lines are provided.

[Retract priority data storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pull-in priority data storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 46. The pull-in priority data storage area includes a pull-in priority data storage area for the left reel, a pull-in priority data storage area for the middle reel, and a pull-in priority data storage area for the right reel. That is, the pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each type of reel.

In each attraction priority data storage area, the attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position "0" to "20" of the corresponding reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to the pull-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not a more appropriate number of sliding pieces exists in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the above-mentioned stop table.

The content of the priority pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority data storage area differs depending on the type of the pull-in priority table number in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 37) referred to when determining the pull-in priority data. .. Further, the pull-in priority data indicates that the larger the value, the higher the priority.

By referring to the pull-in priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol whose highest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the search order defined by the above-mentioned search order table (see FIG. 38).

<Transition flow of game state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the transition flow of the gaming state between the “RT0 gaming state” and the “RT4 gaming state” controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, five types of gaming states of "RT0 gaming state" to "RT4 gaming state" are provided as RT gaming states. Then, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) controls the transition between the “RT0 gaming state” and the “RT4 gaming state” with reference to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17).

First, at the time of shipment, the gaming state is "RT0 gaming state". Next, in the "RT0 game state", when the combination of the symbols related to the "bell spilled eyes" is displayed on the effective line, the game state shifts to the "RT1 game state". Further, in the "RT2 game state", "RT3 game state", or "RT4 game state", the game state is also "RT1 game state" when the combination of symbols related to "bell spilled eyes" is displayed on the effective line. To move to. The "bell spilled eyes" in the present embodiment serve as indicators for "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" shown in FIG.

Further, in the "RT3 game state" or the "RT4 game state", the game state shifts to the "RT1 game state" even when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip A" is displayed on the effective line. The “pushing order rip A” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_CU_REP_A” and “C_CU_REP_A” shown in FIG.

In the "RT1 game state", when the combination of symbols related to the "push order lip B" is displayed on the effective line, the game state shifts to the "RT2 game state". Further, in the "RT3 game state" or the "RT4 game state", the game state shifts to the "RT2 game state" even when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip B" is displayed on the effective line. The "pushing order lip B" in the present embodiment serves as a display for "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" shown in FIG.

In the "RT2 game state", when the combination of symbols related to "BB / RB lip" is displayed on the effective line, the game state shifts to the "RT3 game state". The "BB / RB lip" in the present embodiment serves as a display for "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z" and "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D" shown in FIG.

In the "RT3 game state", when the combination of symbols related to the "push order lip C" is displayed on the effective line, the game state shifts to the "RT4 game state". Further, in the "RT1 game state" or the "RT2 game state", the game state shifts to the "RT4 game state" even when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip C" is displayed on the effective line. The “pushing order lip C” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” shown in FIG.

In "RT1 game state", "RT2 game state", "RT3 game state" or "RT4 game state", when the combination of symbols related to "lower bell" is displayed on the valid line, the game state is " It shifts to "RT0 game state". The "lower bell" in the present embodiment serves as a display for "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E" shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, the first ART is executed when the RT gaming state is the "RT3 gaming state", and the second ART is executed when the RT gaming state is the "RT4 gaming state". The "RT3 gaming state" shifts when the display combinations of "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z" and "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D" are established during the RT2 gaming state. For example, the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS_A" is "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7". That is, a combination of symbols based on the number "7", which is usually adopted as a combination of symbols related to the operation of the bonus (in addition, a design having better visibility than other symbols may be used). When the stop display is displayed, the RT gaming state shifts to the "RT3 gaming state", and the first ART is executed. Therefore, the first ART executed during the RT3 gaming state is referred to as a "pseudo-bonus".

In the present embodiment, when the execution of the first ART is determined in the "RT1 game state", the stop order (stop order for displaying the combination of symbols related to the "push order lip B" on the effective line ( (Display auxiliary information) is notified, and the combination of symbols related to "push order lip B" is displayed on the effective line. After that, when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip B" is displayed on the effective line, the RT gaming state shifts from the "RT1 gaming state" to the "RT2 gaming state".

Then, in the "RT2 game state", the display auxiliary information for displaying the combination of the symbols related to the "BB / RB lip" on the effective line is notified. After that, when the combination of symbols related to "BB / RB lip" is displayed on the effective line, the RT game state shifts from the "RT2 game state" to the "RT3 game state". As a result, the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the second ART is determined in the "RT1 gaming state", "RT2 gaming state", or "RT3 gaming state", the symbol related to "pushing order lip C" is determined. The stop order (display auxiliary information) for displaying the combination of is on the valid line is notified. Then, it waits for the combination of symbols related to "pushing order lip C" to be displayed on the effective line. After that, when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip C" is displayed on the effective line, the RT game state shifts to the "RT4 game state". As a result, the second ART is executed.

[Correspondence table between internal winning combination and stop order]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the stop order will be described. FIG. 48 is a correspondence table between the internal winning combination and the stop order, and shows the types of display combinations according to the stop order.

“C_CU_REP” described in FIG. 48 indicates a display combination (“C_CU_REP_A”, “C_CU_REP_B”) in which the transition to the RT1 gaming state is determined. Then, "C_CD_REP" indicates a display combination ("C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I") in which the transition to the RT2 gaming state is determined. Further, the “normal rip” indicates a display combination (“C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”) related to the re-game not related to the transition of the game state.

Further, “C_BNS” shown in FIG. 48 indicates a display combination (“C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”) in which the transition to the RT3 gaming state (first ART) is determined. As for "C_BNS * 1" shown in FIG. 48, "C_BNS_A" is most likely to be displayed and "C_BNS_O" to "C_BNS_T" are not displayed when the stop control using the stop table is performed. Further, in "C_BNS * 2", when the stop control using the stop table is performed, "C_BNS_O" is most likely to be displayed, and "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_N" and "C_BNS_U" to "C_BNS_Z" are not displayed.

“C_SBB” described in FIG. 48 indicates a display combination (“C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”) in which the transition to the RT3 gaming state (first ART) is determined. Then, "C_Small V" is a display combination ("C_Small V_REP_A" that determines the transition to the RT4 gaming state (second ART).
"-" C_Small V_REP_C ") is shown.

“C_3_BEL” described in FIG. 48 indicates a display combination (“C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_3_BEL_B1” to “C_3_BEL_B8”, “C_3_BEL_C1” to “C_3_BEL_C”) not related to the transition of the gaming state. When "C_3_BEL" is established, three medals are paid out. Similar to "C_3_BEL", "C_9_BEL" indicates a display combination ("C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D") that is not involved in the transition of the gaming state. If "C_9_BEL" is established, 9 medals will be paid out.

“C_ONE” described in FIG. 48 indicates a display combination (“C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E”) in which the transition to the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state) is determined. “C_HAZ” indicates a display combination (“C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H”) in which the transition to the RT1 gaming state is determined.

Further, "C_13_BEL" shown in FIG. 48 indicates a display combination ("C_13_BEL_A" to "C_13_BEL_AP") not related to the transition of the gaming state, and "C_14_BEL" is a display combination not related to the transition of the gaming state ("C_14_BEL"). "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_K") are shown. When "C_13_BEL" is established, 13 medals are paid out, and when "C_14_BEL" is established, 14 medals are paid out.

During the MB game state, either "C_13_BEL" or "C_14_BEL" can be established, and the MB game state ends when more than 13 medals are paid out. For example, when "C_14_BEL" is established in the first game in the MB game state, the MB game state ends in that game. As a result, the player acquires 11 medals (14 (payout number) -3 (insertion number) = 11 (acquisition number)).

On the other hand, when "C_13_BEL" is established in the first game and "C_14_BEL" is established in the second game during the MB game state, the player has 21 cards (27 (payout number) -6 (input number) = 21 ( The number of medals won)) can be won. In the MB game state, the winning numbers "1" (rotation stop number "43"), "4" (rotation stop number "46"), "19" (rotation stop number "61") , "21" (rotation stop number "63") is determined, "C_14_BEL" is established in the first game.

In the present embodiment, the stop display of the combination of various symbols related to the replay such as "C_CU_REP" and "C_CD_REP", and the combination of various symbols related to "bell" such as "C_ONE", "C_3_BEL" and "C_9_BEL" The push order is set for each success or failure of the stop display of.

For example, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "12", the internal winning combination is "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P", "C_CU_REP_A", "C_CU_REP_B" and "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" are duplicated. Further, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "12", "12" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, any one of "C_CU_REP_A" and "C_CU_REP_B", provided that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is "left middle right" or "left and right middle". ) Is stopped and displayed. Further, on condition that the stop order is "middle left / right" or "middle right / left", the combination of symbols related to "C_CD_REP" (any of "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I") is stopped and displayed. Further, on the condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", the combination of symbols related to "normal rip" (any of "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P") is stopped and displayed. Will be done.

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small win / replay is "14", "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_J", "C_BNS_O" to "C_BNS_T", "C_BNS_Y", and "C_C_REP" are used as internal winning wins. , "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P", "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_F" will win. Further, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "12", "14" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, "normal rip" ("C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P", provided that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is "middle left / right" or "middle right / left". The combination of symbols related to)) is stopped and displayed. In addition, the combination of symbols related to any of "C_BNS * 1" ("C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_J", "C_BNS_Y") is stopped on condition that the stop order is "left middle right" and "left and right middle". Is displayed. If the stop order is "right, left, middle," or "right, middle, left," and the stop operation timing is a predetermined timing (correct answer), any of "C_BNS * 2" ("C_BNS_O" to "C_BNS_T"). The combination of symbols related to () is stopped and displayed. If the timing of the stop operation is not a predetermined timing (correct answer), the combination of symbols related to "C_Oyama REP_A" to "C_Oyama REP_F" is stopped and displayed.

In the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "25", "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D", "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", and "C_3_BEL_B1" to "C_3_B" are used as internal winning combinations. , "C_3_BEL_C1" to "C_3_BEL_C4", "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E" win. Further, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "25", "25" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, "C_3_BEL" ("C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_3_BEL_B1", provided that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is "left middle right" or "left and right middle". "C_3_BEL_B8", "C_3_BEL_C1" to "C_3_BEL_C4")), the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, on the condition that the stop order is "middle left / right" and "middle right / left", the combination of symbols related to "C_9_BEL" (any of "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D") is stopped and displayed. Further, the combination of symbols related to "C_ONE" (any of "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E") is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left".

In the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "28", the internal winning combination is "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D", "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_CHN_A", "C_ONE_A". "-" C_ONE_E "wins. Further, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "28", "28" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is "left middle right" or "left and right middle", and the stop button pressing timing for the rotating reel is a predetermined timing (correct answer). For example, the combination of symbols related to "C_3_BEL" (any of "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4") is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle" and the stop button pressing timing for the rotating reel is other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), "C_HAZ" ("C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H") The combination of symbols related to)) is stopped and displayed. As a result, medals are not paid out.

Therefore, when the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle", three medals are paid out if the stop button pressing timing is a predetermined timing (correct answer). If the timing of pressing the stop button is other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), the medal is not paid out.

Further, on the condition that the stop order is "middle left / right" and "middle right / left", the combination of symbols related to "C_9_BEL" (any of "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D") is stopped and displayed. As a result, nine medals will be paid out. Further, the combination of symbols related to "C_ONE" (any of "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E") is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". As a result, one medal is paid out.

[Correspondence table of internal winning combination, stop order and RT transition]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop order, and the RT transition will be described. FIG. 49 is a correspondence table between the internal winning combination, the stop order, and the RT shift, and shows the shift destination of the RT game state according to the stop order.

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small combination / replay is "12", the symbol related to "normal lip" is provided on the condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". The combination of is stopped and displayed. As a result, the RT game state is not changed.

For example, in the RT4 gaming state (second ART), if the end of the "RT4 gaming state" has not been determined, the stop order should be "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" (display auxiliary information). ) Is notified. As a result, the combination of symbols related to the "normal lip" is stopped and displayed, and the RT4 gaming state is maintained. That is, in order not to shift from the RT4 gaming state (second ART) to another RT gaming state, it is notified that the stop order should be set to "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left".

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small combination / replay is "14", "C_BNS (* 1)" is provided on condition that the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle". The combination of symbols related to is stopped and displayed. As a result, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

For example, when the transition to the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the "BB flag" or "BB preparing flag" described later is on, the stop order is set to "left middle right" or Notifies that it is better to set it to "middle left and right" and that it is better to aim at the stop display of the combination of the symbols "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 1)" is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 1)" (combination of symbols reminiscent of BB), the stop order should be "left middle right" or "left and right middle". Notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the combination of the symbols of "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7".

On the other hand, when the transition to the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the "RB flag" or "RB preparing flag" described later is on, the stop order is set to "right / left middle" or "right / left middle". Notifies that it is better to set it to "right, middle, left" and that it is better to aim for the stop display of the combination of "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" symbols (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 2)" is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 2)" (combination of symbols reminiscent of RB), the stop order should be "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". Notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the combination of the symbols of "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7".

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small combination / replay is "18", the symbol related to "C_SBB" is provided on the condition that the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle". The combination is stopped and displayed. As a result, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

For example, when the transition to the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the "SBB flag" or "SBB preparing flag" described later is on, the stop order is set to "left middle right" or Notifies that it is better to set it to "middle left and right" and that it is better to aim for the stop display of the combination of the symbols "white 7"-"white 7"-"white 7" (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" (combination of symbols reminiscent of SBB), the stop order should be "left middle right" or "left and right middle", and "white 7"- Notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the combination of "white 7"-"white 7" symbols.

On the other hand, when the transition to the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the "SBB flag" or "SBB preparing flag" is off, the stop order is set to "middle left / right" or "middle right / left". Is set to "" to notify that it is good (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to the "normal lip" is stopped and displayed, and the RT game state is not changed. That is, in order not to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" (combination of symbols reminiscent of SBB), it is notified that the stop order should be "middle left and right" or "middle right left".

<Explanation of sub-game state>
Here, the sub-game state will be described. In the present embodiment, various gaming states related to the effect controlled by the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) are referred to as "sub gaming states". In the present embodiment, a general state, a CZ (chance zone), a first ART (pseudo-bonus), a second ART, and a BR (battle rush) are set as sub-game states.

[General state]
The general state is a sub-game state executed during the RT0 game state, the RT1 game state, and the RT2 game state. During this general state, basically, whether or not to shift (enter) the sub-game state to CZ by referring to the CZ (chance zone) lottery table (see FIG. 50 described later) described later for each game. A lottery (CZ lottery) is performed. Then, when the transition to CZ is decided, a lottery is performed to determine the number of precursor games until the transition to CZ (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of precursor games of CZ").

In the pachislot machine of the present invention, a CZ lottery table may be used in which a lottery for the number of CZ precursor games is performed at the same time as a lottery for whether or not to shift to CZ. That is, whether or not to shift to CZ and the number of CZ precursor games when shifting to CZ may be determined by one lottery.

[CZ (Chance Zone)]
CZ is a sub-game state executed during the RT0 game state and the RT1 game state. When the transition to the CZ is determined in the general state and the games of the number of CZ precursor games are exhausted, the sub-game state shifts from the general state to the CZ. Then, after the sub-game state shifts to CZ, a notification that it is good to stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") (hereinafter, "Navigation aiming at black BAR"") Is performed a specified number of times, the CZ ends.

When the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is stopped and displayed during CZ, the execution of the first ART is determined. Further, in the present embodiment, if a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) are exhausted before the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" is performed a predetermined number of times, the execution of the first ART is determined.

In this embodiment, two types of CZs, "CZ1" and "CZ2", are provided as CZs. In "CZ1", "4" is set as the specified number of times to perform "navigation aiming at the black BAR". That is, the "CZ1" ends when the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" is performed four times. On the other hand, in "CZ2", "10" is set as a predetermined number of times to perform "navigation aiming at black BAR". That is, the "CZ2" ends when the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" is performed 10 times. The number of times the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" in "CZ1" and "CZ2" is performed is managed by the cut-in number counter during CZ.

In "CZ1" and "CZ2", when a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") is determined as the internal winning combination, the probability of executing "navigation aiming at black BAR" is the same. In addition, the probability of executing "navigation aiming at the black BAR" when a specific internal winning combination is not determined as the internal winning combination is also the same. Therefore, "CZ2", which has a large number of specified times for "navigation aiming at black BAR", has a higher probability that the execution of the first ART is decided than "CZ1".

In "CZ2", the probability of winning a pseudo-bonus in the bonus lottery may be higher than in "CZ1". Further, in the "CZ2" according to the gaming machine of the present invention, for example, the probability of winning a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") may be higher than that of the "CZ1".

[First ART]
The first ART is a sub-game state executed during the RT3 game state, which is a so-called pseudo-bonus. For example, the winning of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined when the pseudo-bonus is won by the bonus lottery during the general state, the CZ, the first ART, and the second ART. In addition, the execution of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is also determined when the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is stopped and displayed during CZ.

Further, the winning of the first ART is also determined when the number of bonus winning games determined in advance by the lottery is exhausted after the end of the first ART. The number of bonus winning games determined in advance by the lottery is set in the bonus winning game number counter. The value of the bonus winning game counter is subtracted by "1" for each game played after the end of the first ART. Then, when the bonus winning game number counter becomes "0", the winning of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined.

When the second ART is started after the end of the first ART, the bonus winning game number counter is subtracted from the game in the second ART. In addition, if a pseudo bonus is won by a bonus lottery before the value of the bonus winning game counter becomes "0", or if a pseudo bonus winning is determined during CZ, the number of bonus winning games is newly increased. Determined by lottery.

As the first ART (pseudo-bonus), three types of pseudo-bonus of RB (regular bonus), BB (big bonus), and SBB (super big bonus) are provided. In the present embodiment, when the winning of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined, any one of RB, BB, and SBB is determined by the lottery.

The number of staying games (hereinafter, "the number of first ART start G (games)") of RB, BB, and SBB is different from each other. In the present embodiment, the number of first ART start Gs when the type of pseudo-bonus is RB is determined to be "30". Further, the number of first ART start Gs in the case of BB is determined to be "60", and the number of first ART start Gs in the case of SBB is determined to be "100".

The "first ART start G number" determined according to the type of the pseudo bonus is set in the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter. The value of the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game in the first ART (pseudo-bonus). The first ART (pseudo-bonus) ends when the value of the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter becomes "0".

The first ART is started after the games of the first ART precursor games number determined by lottery are digested and the games being prepared are passed. In the first ART precursor game, an effect of notifying whether or not the first ART (pseudo-bonus) has been won is performed. Then, when the first ART is won and the type is BB or SBB, the game during the preparation for BB is performed after the first ART precursor game is completed. On the other hand, when the type of the first ART is RB, the game during the preparation for RB is performed after the end of the first ART precursor game.

In the game during BB preparation when the determined pseudo-bonus type is BB, the combination stop display of the symbols related to the transition to the RT2 game state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 game state (“normal rip”). The stop order for making the operation is notified. When the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is "14" to "17", the combination of symbols related to the above-mentioned "C_BNS (* 1)" (combination of symbols reminiscent of BB) is used. The stop order for displaying the stop is notified. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 1)" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART in which the pseudo-bonus type is BB is started.

In the game during BB preparation when the determined pseudo-bonus type is SBB, the combination stop display of the symbols related to the transition to the RT2 game state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 game state (“normal rip”). The stop order for making the operation is notified. Further, when the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is "18", the stop order for displaying the stop display of the combination of symbols related to the above-mentioned "C_SBB" (combination of symbols reminiscent of SBB) is Be notified. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART in which the pseudo-bonus type is SBB is started.

In the game being prepared for RB, the stop order for displaying the combination stop display of the symbols related to the transition to the RT2 game state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 game state (“normal rip”) is notified. Further, when the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is "14" to "17", the combination of symbols related to the above-mentioned "C_BNS * 2" (combination of symbols reminiscent of RB) is stopped and displayed. The stop order for making the operation is notified. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS * 2" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART in which the pseudo-bonus type is RB is started.

[Second ART]
The second ART is a sub-game state executed during the RT4 game state. For example, the winning of the second ART is during the game of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) in which the type of the pseudo-bonus started by winning in the sub-game state other than during the second ART is BB (hereinafter, "" It is determined when ART is won by ART lottery (referred to as "BB during non-ART"). When the winning of the second ART is determined, "50" is determined as the number of games staying in the second ART (hereinafter, "the number of G (games) starting the second ART").

"50", which is the "second ART start G number", is set in the ART game number counter. The value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game in the second ART. The second ART ends when the value of the ART game number counter becomes "0".

The second ART is started after the games of the number of the second ART precursor games determined by the lottery are digested and the games in preparation for ART are passed. In the second ART precursor game, an effect of notifying whether or not the second ART has been won is performed. Then, when the second ART is won, the ART preparing game is played after the second ART precursor game is completed.

In the ART preparation game, the stop order for displaying the stop display of the combination of symbols related to the above-mentioned "C_small V" is notified. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_Small V" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state, and the second ART is started.

In the second ART, the number of additional games is drawn (lottery for the number of additional games) by referring to the number of additional games lottery table (not shown) for each game, and the determined number of additional games is added to the ART game number counter. That is, as the number of additional games is determined in the second ART, the number of ART games increases, and the second ART, which is advantageous for the player, can be continued for a long time.

[BR (Battle Rush)]
BR (Battle Rush) is a sub-game state related to an effect in which the number of ART games is expected to be added (added), and is executed during the second ART. The lottery for whether or not to execute this BR is performed during the game of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) in which the type of the pseudo-bonus started by winning during the second ART is BB (hereinafter, "during ART". It is performed for each game in (referred to as BB). In addition, the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted during the period during which BR is being executed.

In BR, a BR continuation lottery is performed every predetermined number of games (“10” in the present embodiment), and when BR continuation is decided, an additional G (game) number lottery is drawn to draw an additional (additional) number of ART games. Do. The number of additional games determined by the additional G number lottery is notified in the last (10th game) game of the predetermined number of games. Further, the determined number of additional games is added to the ART game number counter.

Further, when the number of times BR continuation is determined (BR continuation number) is a specific number (n times "5" (n = 1, 2, 3 ...) In this embodiment), the additional G number. An additional G (game) number lottery, which is different from the lottery, is performed.

As the additional G number lottery of the present embodiment, five types of lottery are provided: "additional addition A", "additional addition B", "additional addition C1", "additional addition C2", and "additional addition C3". When the additional G number lottery is performed, the type of the additional G number lottery is determined by the additional G number lottery during BR, and the number of additional games is determined by the determined additional G number lottery.

The determination and notification of the number of additional games by the additional G number lottery is performed by a special number of games (“2” in the present embodiment) performed after the predetermined number of games are completed. Further, the number of additional games determined by the additional G number lottery is added to the number of additional games counter. When the game of the special number of games is completed, the game of the predetermined number of games is started, and if the BR continuation is decided, the determined number of additional games is notified in the last game of the predetermined number of games. To.

In this way, in BR, when the number of ART games to be added (added) is determined, there is an opportunity for the next number of ART games to be added after the predetermined number of games. As a result, the interest in determining the addition of the number of ART games can be continued, and the interest in the game can be improved for a long period of time.

In addition, in a predetermined number of games in BR, it is possible to perform an effect in which the addition of the number of ART games is expected to be continuous. As a result, the player's expectation of obtaining an advantageous privilege (addition of the number of ART games) is maintained, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, since the continuous lottery is performed for each predetermined number of games, it is possible to suggest the result of the continuous lottery in the games of the predetermined number of games. That is, it is possible to suggest the result of continuous lottery by using the continuous effect performed over a plurality of games. As a result, even if the game in which the addition (addition) of the number of ART games is not determined continues, the interest of the game can be prevented from deteriorating.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of times the continuation is decided exceeds the specified number (“20” in the present embodiment), as a privilege, the first ART (pseudo-bonus) winning and BR ( The start of the battle rush) is decided. As a result, the result of the continuous lottery can include an expectation for the granting of benefits other than the granting of the number of additional games, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of times the continuation is determined is a specific number (n times (n = 1, 2, 3 ...) Of "5" in the present embodiment), an additional G number is drawn. Another additional G number lottery will be performed. As a result, there is a possibility that the value of the number of additional games will increase due to the continuation of the continuation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Structure of data table stored in ROM cartridge board>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 will be described.

[CZ (chance zone) lottery table]
First, the CZ (chance zone) lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ lottery table is referred to when the sub-game state is the general state. This CZ lottery table shows the correspondence between the winning contents of the CZ (chance zone) and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the CZ lottery using the CZ lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is specified in the CZ lottery table. Subtract sequentially by value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

As shown in FIG. 50, when the CZ lottery is performed with reference to the CZ lottery table, there is a high probability that the lottery result will be "no win". For example, when the winning number is "27" (abbreviated as "F_strong bell"), there is a probability of 32718/32768 that there is no winning, and a probability of 50/32768 that it is "CZ2 winning".

[CZ medium cut-in additional lottery table]
Next, the cut-in additional lottery table in CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 51. The cut-in additional lottery table in CZ is referred to when the sub-game state is CZ. This cut-in additional lottery table in CZ shows the correspondence between the presence or absence of addition of a specified number of times and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the cut-in additional lottery using the cut-in additional lottery table in CZ, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is extracted in CZ. Cut-in addition The lottery value specified in the additional lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the winning number is "27" (abbreviation "F_strong bell"), "1 addition to the specified number of times" is always determined, and the winning number is "34" (abbreviation "F_watermelon"). In some cases, "1 addition to the specified number of times" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768. When "1 is added to the specified number of times" is determined, "1" is added to the value of the cut-in number counter during CZ. As a result, the number of times of performing "navigation aiming at the black BAR" in CZ increases by one.

[CZ medium cut-in occurrence lottery table]
Next, a lottery table for generating cut-in in CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 52. The cut-in occurrence lottery table during CZ is referred to when the sub-game state is CZ. This CZ medium cut-in occurrence lottery table shows the correspondence between the presence or absence of loss cut-in occurrence when the result of the internal lottery is “loss” and the lottery value set for them.

In the cut-in generation lottery using the cut-in generation lottery table in CZ, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is extracted in CZ. The lottery value specified in the cut-in occurrence lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is "loss", "loss cut-in occurrence" is determined with a probability of 10000/32768. The "missing cut-in" is a "navigation aiming at the black BAR" performed when a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") does not win. In "Navi for aiming at black BAR", it is good to stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E"), and the stop order (right, middle, left) in that case. Notify. When the loss cut-in is executed, the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is not stopped and displayed. Even when a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") is winning, "Navigation aiming at black BAR" is performed.

[Bonus lottery table]
Next, the bonus lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 53. The bonus lottery table is referred to when the sub-game state is the general state or the second ART. This bonus lottery table shows the correspondence between the presence or absence of a pseudo-bonus winning and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the bonus lottery using the bonus lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is specified in the bonus lottery table. Subtract sequentially by value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, if the winning number is "27" (abbreviated as "F_strong bell"), 16384/3.
The "bonus winning" is determined with a probability of 2768, and when the winning number is "34" (abbreviated as "F_watermelon"), the "bonus winning" is determined with a probability of 326/32768. When the "bonus win" is determined, the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is started after the first ART precursor game and the preparing game corresponding to various pseudo-bonuses.

The bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 53 is a bonus lottery table for a low probability in which the probability that the "bonus win" is determined is a predetermined probability. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, a bonus lottery table for high probability is also provided, which has a higher probability that the "bonus win" is determined than the bonus lottery table for low probability. In the present embodiment, the bonus lottery table to be used is determined according to the types of a plurality of modes described later.

[Lottery table with additional G number in BB]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a lottery table for adding the number of G in BB will be described. The G number addition lottery table in BB is referred to when the sub-game state is BB in the first ART. The lottery table for adding the number of Gs in the BB shows the correspondence between the contents of the addition and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the BB medium G number addition lottery using the BB medium G number addition lottery, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected. Add the number of G in BB and subtract sequentially at the lottery value specified in the lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the winning number is "27" (abbreviation "F_strong bell"), "20G" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and the winning number is "34" (abbreviation "F_watermelon"). In the case of, "10G" is determined with a probability of 2000/32768. When the G (game) number such as "10G" or "20G" is determined, the determined G number is added to the BB medium-high probability counter.

[ART lottery table in BB]
Next, the ART lottery table in BB will be described with reference to FIG. 55. The ART lottery table in BB shown in FIG. 55 is referred to when the sub-game state is BB in non-ART and is a high probability state described later. This ART lottery table in BB is the second when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11"). The correspondence between the presence or absence of winning ART and the lottery value set for them is shown.

In the ART lottery using the ART lottery table in BB, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is put into the ART lottery table in BB. Subtract sequentially at the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

As shown in FIG. 55, when the sub-game state is BB during non-ART, and the probability state is high, and the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination, the "ART winning" is always displayed. It is determined. This "ART winning" means that the winning of the second ART has been decided. When the "ART winning" is determined, the second ART is started after the second ART precursor game and the ART preparing game.

[BR lottery table in BB]
Next, the BR lottery table in BB will be described with reference to FIG. 56. The BR lottery table in BB is referred to when the sub-game state is BB in ART and is in a high probability state. This BR lottery table in BB is a BR winning combination when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11"). The correspondence between the presence or absence of and the lottery value set for them is shown.

In the BR lottery using the BR lottery table in BB, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is put into the BR lottery table in BB. Subtract sequentially at the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

As shown in FIG. 56, when the sub-game state is BB during ART and the probability state is high, and the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination, there is a probability of 16384/32768. "Battle Rush 1 (BR1) Win" is determined, and "Battle Rush 2 (BR2) Win" is determined with a probability of 3276/32768. "BR2" has a higher probability of winning "BR continuation" in the continuous lottery than "BR1". The determined "BR1" or "BR2" is started after the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is completed.

[BR continuous lottery table]
Next, the BR continuous lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. The BR1 continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 57 is referred to when the sub-game state is BR1. Further, the BR2 continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 58 is referred to when the sub-game state is BR2. The BR1 continuous lottery table and the BR2 continuous lottery table show the correspondence between the presence or absence of BR continuation and the lottery value set for them.

In the BR1 continuous lottery table or the BR lottery using the BR2 continuous lottery table, first, the random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is continuously subjected to BR1. The lottery value specified in the lottery table or the BR2 continuous lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the BR continuous lottery using the BR1 continuous lottery table, "BR continuation" is determined with a probability of 26214/32768. Further, as shown in FIG. 58, in the BR continuous lottery using the BR2 continuous lottery table, "BR continuation" is determined with a probability of 29490/32768.

[Additional lottery table during BR]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the additional lottery table added during BR will be described. The additional lottery table during BR is referred to when the sub-game state is BR. The additional lottery table added during BR shows the correspondence between the contents of the addition and the lottery value set according to the number of continuations of BR.

In the additional addition lottery using the additional addition lottery table during BR, first, the random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is additionally added during BR. The lottery values specified in the lottery table are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the number of continuations of BR is "5" (BR5th station), "additional addition A" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and "additional addition B" is determined with a probability of 9434/32768. To. Further, in this case, "additional addition C1" is determined with a probability of 4000/32768, "additional addition C2" is determined with a probability of 2500/32768, and "additional addition C3" is determined with a probability of 450/32768. Will be done.

[Additional addition and promotion lottery table during BR]
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the additional addition and promotion lottery table in BR will be described. The additional addition and promotion lottery tables during BR are referred to when the sub-game state is BR. The additional addition and promotion lottery table in BR shows the correspondence between the contents of the addition and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the additional addition and promotion lottery using the additional addition and promotion lottery table in BR, first, the random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is set. Additional additions during BR and promotion The lottery value specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the winning number is "27" (abbreviation "F_strong bell"), 25768/3
The "additional addition C1" is determined with a probability of 2768, and the "additional addition C2" is determined with a probability of 6000/32768. In this case, the "additional addition C3" is determined with a probability of 1000/32768. If it has already been decided to perform the additional additional lottery, the additional additional lottery during BR and the promotion lottery table are used to draw a lottery as to whether or not to promote to the higher additional additional lottery.

It should be noted that the higher-ranked additional additional lottery has a higher expectation (probability) that the value of the number of additional games to be determined will be larger than that of the lower-ranked additional additional lottery. In the present embodiment, "additional addition B" is higher than "additional addition A", and "additional addition C1", "additional addition C2", and "additional addition C3" are higher than "additional addition B". .. In addition, "additional addition C2" is higher than "additional addition C1", and "additional addition C3" is higher than "additional addition C2".

[Additional addition A addition G number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the additional addition A addition G number lottery table will be described. The additional G number lottery table for the additional additional A is referred to when the additional G number lottery related to the "additional additional A" is performed in BR. The additional G number additional G number lottery table shows the correspondence between the additional G number and the lottery value set according to the additional G number.

In the additional G number lottery using the additional additional A additional G number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is added. Addition A Addition G Number The lottery value specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, in the additional G number lottery using the additional additional A additional G number lottery table, "10" is determined as the "additional game number" with a probability of 12568/32768, and as the "additional game number" with a probability of 13000/32768. "20" is determined. Further, "100" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 500/32768, and "200" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 100/32768. Then, the determined value of the "number of additional games" is added to the ART game number counter.

[Additional addition B addition G number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the additional addition B addition G number lottery table will be described. The additional G number lottery table for the additional additional B is referred to when the additional G number lottery related to the "additional additional B" is performed in BR. The additional G number additional G number lottery table shows the correspondence between the additional G number and the lottery value set according to the stop operation.

The additional G number lottery using the additional additional B additional G number lottery table is performed every time a stop operation is detected. The “1 on” column in FIG. 62 is referred to when the first stop operation (the first stop operation is performed) is performed. Further, the column of "2on_before +10" is referred to when the second stop operation (second stop operation) is performed after "10" is determined as the number of additional games in the first stop operation. To. Then, the column of "3on_before +10" is referred to when the third stop operation (third stop operation) is performed after "10" is determined as the number of additional games in the second stop operation. To.

In the additional G number lottery using the additional additional B additional G number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is added. Addition B Addition G Number The lottery value specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, in the case of "1on", "20" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 13000/32768. If the second stop operation is performed after "20" is determined as the "additional game number" in the first stop operation, "2on_before +20" in the additional G number lottery.
Is referred to.

For example, in the case of "2on_before +20", "30" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 6000/32768. When the third stop operation is performed after "30" is determined as the "additional game number" in the second stop operation, the column of "3on_before +30" is referred to in the additional G number lottery.

For example, in the case of "3on_before +30", "50" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 500/32768. In this case, by performing the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, a total of "100" is acquired as the "number of additional games", and "100" is set in the ART game number counter. Is added.

With reference to the column of "2on_before +20" in FIG. 62, "0" and "10" are not determined as the number of additional games. Further, referring to the column of "2on_before +30" in FIG. 62, "0", "10" and "20" are not determined as the number of additional games. Then, referring to the column of "3on_before +50", "0", "10", "20" and "30" are not determined as the number of additional games.

In this way, in the additional G number lottery using the additional B additional G number lottery table, the number of additional games determined by the second stop operation is equal to or greater than the number of additional games determined by the first stop operation, and the third The number of additional games determined by the stop operation is equal to or greater than the number of additional games determined by the second stop operation.

[Additional addition C addition G number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the additional addition C addition G number lottery table will be described. The additional G number lottery table for the additional C is referred to when the additional G number lottery related to the "additional additional C1", "additional additional C2", or "additional additional C3" is performed in BR. This additional G number additional G number lottery table shows the correspondence between the additional G number and the lottery value set according to the type of additional additional C (C1 to C3).

The additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table is performed every time the player detects that the MAX bet button 14 is pressed, and ends when "0" is determined as the "additional game number". ("No continuation").

In the additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is added. Addition C Addition G Number The lottery value specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the type of the additional addition C is "additional addition C1", "0" is determined as the "additional game number" with a probability of 8918/32768. Further, when the type of the additional addition C is "additional addition C2", "0" is determined as the "additional game number" with a probability of 4918/32768. Then, when the type of the additional addition C is "additional addition C3", "0" is determined as the "additional game number" with a probability of 2918/32768.

That is, the "additional addition C2" has a higher probability that the additional G number lottery will continue than the "additional additional C1", and the "additional additional C3" has a higher probability that the additional G number lottery will continue than the "additional additional C2". high.

In addition, when the start lever 16 is operated and the next game is started when the additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table is started, the additional additional C additional G number is automatically added. An additional G number lottery is performed using a lottery table. Then, when "0" is determined as the "number of additional games" in the automatically added G number lottery, the automatic additional G number lottery ends. In the automatic addition G number lottery, an upper limit value (for example, "1000") of the value of the "additional game number" to be determined may be set.

Further, in the additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table, a value other than "0" is determined as the "additional game number", and the start lever 16 is operated in a state where "continuation" is determined. In some cases. In this case, the "number of additional games" determined up to that point is valid, and the additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table is automatically performed. Then, the "number of additional games" determined before the automatically performed additional G number lottery is added to the "additional game number" determined in the automatically performed additional G number lottery, and the additional game is added. C Addition G number Let it be the "additional game number" obtained by the addition G number lottery using the lottery table.

[Causal value lottery table]
Next, the causal value lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 72. The causal value lottery table is referred to when the causal value lottery is performed by satisfying various conditions. This causal value lottery table shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to various conditions.

In the present embodiment, there is a possibility that a value called "causal value" is obtained in various situations where the interest of the game is lowered (the player feels uncomfortable). Then, a privilege advantageous to the player is given based on the accumulated "causal value". Therefore, even if there is a situation in which the interest of the game is lowered, there is a possibility that advantageous benefits can be obtained after that. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game due to a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the causal value lottery using the causal value lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is specified in the causal value lottery table. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 64 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 1). This causal value lottery table (No. 1) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of games (G) between rare roles.

The rare roles according to this embodiment are "strong bell" (winning number "27"), "watermelon" (winning number "34"), "weak cherry" (winning number "35"), and "strong cherry" (winning number "35"). The numbers are "36") and "chance eyes" (win numbers "38" to "40"). The "G number between rare roles" is the number of games from when any of the rare roles is determined as the internal winning combination to when any of the rare roles is determined as the internal winning combination.

For example, when the "G number between rare roles" reaches "50G (game)", "1" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 3000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. If the "G number between rare roles" exceeds "200G", the causal effect of referring to the "200G" column every time the subsequent "G number between rare roles" increases by 100 games (G). Perform a value lottery.

FIG. 65 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 2). This causal value lottery table (No. 2) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of games (G) between bonuses. The "G number between bonuses" is the number of games from the end of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) to the start of the next first ART (pseudo-bonus).

For example, when the "G number between bonuses" reaches "200G (game)", "1" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 3000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

FIG. 66 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 3). This causal value lottery table (No. 3) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of games (G) between BBs. The "G number between BBs" is the number of games from the end of the BB in the first ART (pseudo-bonus) to the start of the BB in the next first ART (pseudo-bonus).

For example, when the "G number between BBs" reaches "400G (game)", "3" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

FIG. 67 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 4). This causal value lottery table (No. 4) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of games (G) between ARTs. The "G number between ARTs" is the number of games from the end of the second ART to the start of the next second ART.

For example, when the "G number between ARTs" reaches "500G (game)", "3" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

FIG. 68 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 5). This causal value lottery table (No. 5) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of consecutive RBs (the number of consecutive RBs). The "continuous number of RBs (number of consecutive RBs)" is the number of times that RBs are continuously drawn as a type of pseudo-bonus when the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined. The number of consecutive RBs is counted by the RB continuous counter.

For example, when the "RB continuous number" is "4", "5" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 1000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. Further, the value of the RB continuous counter is cleared when BB or SBB is determined in the first ART (pseudo-bonus).

FIG. 69 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 6). This causal value lottery table (No. 6) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of consecutive CZ (chance zone) failures. The "continuous number of CZ failures" is the number of consecutive times that "CZ1" and "CZ2" are terminated without determining the first ART (pseudo-bonus). In the present embodiment, the causal value lottery table (No. 6) is also provided with a column for the first CZ failure. Further, the number of consecutive CZ failures is counted by the CZ failure continuous counter.

For example, when the "number of consecutive CZ failures" is "failure_2 consecutive", "1" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 3000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. Further, the value of the CZ failure continuous counter is cleared when the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined in "CZ1" and "CZ2". The value of the CZ failure continuous counter may be cleared when the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is started.

FIG. 70 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 7). This causal value lottery table (No. 7) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of continuous games of CZ finished without confirming the bonus.

For example, when the "number of continuous Gs of CZ finished without confirming the bonus" is "4G (game)", "10" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 20000 / 32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

“CZ1” and “CZ2” are periods in which the interest of the player is enhanced because the determination of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) can be expected more than the general game. However, since the end condition of "CZ1" and "CZ2" according to the present embodiment is the number of executions of "navigation aiming at black BAR", there is a possibility that it will end in a short period (small number of games). Therefore, when "CZ1" and "CZ2" are completed in a short period of time, the probability of giving a "causal value" or giving a "causal value" is increased. As a result, even if there is a situation in which the interest of the game in "CZ1" and "CZ2" is lowered, there is a possibility that an advantageous privilege can be obtained after that, and it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game. it can.

FIG. 71 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 8). The causal value lottery table (No. 8) is referred to when the setting of the pachislot machine 1 is changed. This causal value lottery table (No. 8) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the causal value.

For example, when the setting of pachislot 1 is changed, "10" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768, and "40" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 8000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

FIG. 72 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 9). This causal value lottery table (No. 9) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of games consumed during the preparation of various pseudo-bonuses and ART (second ART). In addition, the number of games digested during preparation is counted by the preparatory digestion G number counter.

For example, when the "number of games digested during preparation" reaches "20G (game)", "1" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 20000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. In addition, the value of the preparing digestion G number counter is cleared on condition that various pseudo bonuses or the start of the second ART are started.

[Temporary causal value lottery table]
Next, the provisional causal value lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 73. The provisional causal value lottery table is referred to when the development effect fails. This provisional causal value lottery table shows the correspondence between the provisional causal value and the lottery value set according to the type of development effect.

The "development effect" according to the present embodiment is continuously executed over a plurality of games, and whether or not the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is won or whether or not the CZ (chance zone) is won. It is a production that informs you. Then, "when the development effect fails" is a case where the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is not won in the development effect, or the CZ (chance zone) is not won.

The notification that the first ART (pseudo-bonus) was won in the development effect and that the CZ (chance zone) was won was determined to start the "gaming state advantageous to the player" related to the game machine of the present invention. This is a specific example of "notification of things". Then, the notification that the first ART (pseudo-bonus) was not won in the development effect and that the CZ (chance zone) was not won is notified of the "gaming state advantageous for the player" related to the game machine of the present invention. This is a specific example of "notification that the start of is not decided".

The "notification that the start of the gaming state advantageous to the player has been determined" may be notification of various winnings such as the winning of the second ART (ART). In addition, in the case of a game machine having a bonus (so-called "BB", "MB", etc., which serves as a carry-over role), the bonus is given as "notification that the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player has been decided". It can be mentioned that the winner is notified.

In addition, the time when the "gaming state advantageous to the player" is started may be from the next game in which the notification is made, and a special condition is satisfied in the game after the notification is made. It may be the case. As special conditions, for example, a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination related to the bonus) has been decided, and a combination of special symbols (combination of symbols related to the start of the bonus) has been stopped and displayed. Can be mentioned.

Further, the "notification that the start of the gaming state advantageous to the player has been determined" according to the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned deterministic notification of various winnings as described above, and is described above. It may be a notification suggesting various kinds of winnings. In addition, the "notification that the start of the gaming state advantageous to the player has not been determined" according to the gaming machine of the present invention deterministically notifies that the various winnings as described above have not been determined. It may be a notification suggesting that various winnings have not been determined.

In the provisional causal value lottery using the provisional causal value lottery table, first, the random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) are selected from the provisional causal value lottery. The lottery values specified in the table are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when "development effect 1" fails, "3" is determined as "provisional causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768. On the other hand, if the "development effect 4" fails, "3" is determined as the "provisional causal value" with a probability of 3000/32768. The "causal value" is determined based on this "provisional causal value" and the "internal point" described later.

"Development effect 1" shows a specific example of the first effect related to the game machine of the present invention, and "development effect 4" shows a specific example of the second effect related to the game machine of the present invention. The "development effect 4" has a higher probability of being notified that the start of the gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player, has been decided than the "development effect 1". Therefore, in the "development effect 4", if it is notified that the start of the gaming state advantageous to the player has not been decided, the player's dissatisfaction will increase, but an advantageous privilege will be given later. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will be done.

[Internal point lottery table]
Next, the internal point lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 74. The internal point lottery table is referred to when performing an internal point lottery. Then, the internal point lottery is performed in each game. This internal point lottery table shows the correspondence between the internal points and the lottery value set according to the winning number (internal winning combination).

In the internal point lottery using the internal point lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is specified in the internal point lottery table. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, if the winning number is "27" (abbreviation "F_strong bell"), 512/327
With a probability of 68, "1" is determined as the "internal point", and with a probability of 265/32768, "3" is determined as the "internal point". The determined "internal point" is added to the internal point counter.

The value of the internal point counter is the maximum value of the "causal value" determined when the development effect fails. For example, it is assumed that "5" is determined as the "provisional causal value" by the provisional causal value lottery performed when the development effect fails, and the value of the internal point counter at that time is "10". In this case, since "10" is guaranteed as the maximum value of the "causal value", "5" of the "provisional causal value" is determined as the "causal value".

On the other hand, it is assumed that "5" is determined as the "provisional causal value" by the provisional causal value lottery, and the value of the internal point counter at that time is "3". In this case, since "3" is guaranteed as the maximum value of "causal value", "5" of "provisional causal value" is not determined as it is as "causal value", and the internal that has been acquired so far. "3", which is the same value as the point, is determined as the "causal value". If the development effect fails and the "causal value" is determined, the value determined as the "causal value" is subtracted from the value of the internal point counter.

[Causal value stock consumption lottery table]
Next, the causal value stock consumption lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 75. The causal value stock consumption lottery table is referred to when giving a player a favorable privilege based on the value of the causal value stock. This causal value stock consumption lottery table shows the correspondence between the presence or absence of consumption of causal value stock and the lottery value set according to the presence or absence of consumption of causal value stock.

The "causal value stock" is given when the "causal value" becomes "100" or more. Specifically, when the value of the causal value counter becomes "100" or more, "1" is added to the causal value stock counter, and "100" is subtracted from the value of the causal value counter.

In the causal value stock consumption lottery using the causal value stock consumption lottery, first, the random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected as the causal value. Stock consumption The lottery value specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when giving an advantageous privilege to a player based on the value of the causal value stock, "no consumption" of the "causal value stock" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768. In this case, the player is given a privilege that is advantageous without reducing the value of the causal value stock counter.

As a privilege given to the player based on the value of the causal value stock, it is possible to change the type of the pseudo-bonus to a higher pseudo-bonus. For example, when "BB" is determined as a pseudo-bonus, the pseudo-bonus is changed to "SBB". Further, when the transition to CZ1 is decided, the transition to CZ2 may be changed. In this embodiment, a specific example of the privilege giving means in which the sub CPU 102 grants a privilege advantageous to the player is shown.

Benefits that are advantageous to the player are when the "causal value stock" becomes 1 or more, when specific conditions (determination of pseudo-bonus) are met, or at specific timing (pseudo) without immediately granting. It is preferable to give the bonus by lottery). In this case, it is possible to urge the player to play (continue) the game from the time when the "causal value stock" becomes 1 or more until a specific condition is satisfied or a specific timing is reached.

[Operating condition table]
Next, the operating condition table will be described with reference to FIG. 76. The operating condition table is referenced during each preparation. This operating condition table shows the correspondence between the type being prepared and the operating (end) condition set according to the type being prepared.

For example, if the winning number "18" (abbreviated as "F_W7_KP_RT4") is won during the SBB preparation, the SBB preparation is terminated and the SBB in the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is started. If the winning numbers "14" to "17" (abbreviations "F_R7_KP_RB_0", "F_R7_KP_RB_1", "F_RB_KP_R7_0", "F_RB_KP_R7_1") are won during the BB preparation, the BB preparation is completed. BB in (bonus) is started.

If the winning numbers "14" to "17" (abbreviations "F_R7_KP_RB_0", "F_R7_KP_RB_1", "F_RB_KP_R7_0", "F_RB_KP_R7_1") are won during RB preparation, the RB preparation is completed and the 1st bonus RB is started in. Also, during ART preparation, the winning numbers "18" to "24" (abbreviations "F_W7_KP_RT4", "F_KP_R4_R2_1", "F_KP_R4_R2_1", "F_KP_R2_R4-1", "F_KP_R2_R4-1", "F_KP_R2_R4_1", "F_KP_R2_R4_1", "F_KP_R2_R4_1", "F_KP_R2_R4_1" The preparation is finished and the second ART is started.

In the present embodiment, when the winning combination (winning number), which is the end condition under preparation, is won, the information (stop order navigation) for displaying the stop display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (winning number) is notified. However, even if the stop operation is performed without following the stop order navigation and the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination that is the end condition during preparation is not displayed as a stop, the preparation ends.

Therefore, when a stop operation that does not follow the stop order navigation is performed, the RT gaming state does not shift to the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state, and the first ART (pseudo-bonus) or the second ART (pseudo-bonus) or the second ART is started. As a result, the number of games for managing the first ART (pseudo-bonus) and the second ART in the sub-game state is subtracted without shifting to the RT3 game state or the RT4 game state.

<Structure of storage area provided in sub RAM>
[Sub storage area]
Next, the configuration of the sub storage area provided in the sub RAM 103 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. Although the description is omitted here (not shown), various data such as a storage area for registering the effect content and the effect number and the internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8) are stored. It also has a storage area to be used.

The sub storage area has a storage area of "CZ1 flag", "CZ2 flag", "SBB flag", "BB flag", "RB flag", "ART flag", "BR1 flag" and "RB2 flag".

The "CZ1 flag" is a flag indicating whether or not it is in CZ1, and if it is in CZ1, "1" is stored in the storage area of the "CZ1 flag". The "CZ2 flag" is a flag indicating whether or not it is in CZ2, and if it is in CZ2, "1" is stored in the storage area of the "CZ2 flag".

The "SBB flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the SBB is in the first ART (pseudo-bonus), and if it is in the SBB, "1" is stored in the "SBB flag". The "BB flag" is a flag indicating whether or not it is in BB in the first ART, and if it is in BB, "1" is stored in the storage area of the "BB flag". The "RB flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the RB is in the first ART, and if the "RB flag" is in the RB, "1" is stored in the "RB flag". That is, when the sub-game state is the first ART, "1" is stored in any of the storage areas of the "SBB flag", the "BB flag", and the "RB flag".

Further, the "ART flag" is a flag indicating whether or not it is in the second ART, and if it is in the second ART, "1" is stored in the storage area of the "ART flag". ..

The "BR1 flag" is a flag indicating whether or not it is in BR1, and if it is in BR1, "1" is stored in the storage area of the "BR1 flag". Further, the "RB2 flag" is a flag indicating whether or not it is in BR2, and if it is in BR2, "1" is stored in the storage area of the "BR2 flag". As described above, during BR1 and BR2, 10 games are set as one set, and one set (10 games) of BR is repeated (looped) as long as "BR continuation" continues to be won by continuous lottery.

Further, the sub storage area has a storage area of "additional addition A flag", "additional addition B flag", "additional addition C1 flag", "additional addition C2 flag", and "additional addition C3 flag".

The "additional addition A flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the type of the additional addition G number lottery is the additional addition A, and when the type is the additional addition A, the storage area of the "additional addition A flag". "1" is stored in. The "additional addition B flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the type of the additional addition G number lottery is the additional addition B, and when the type is the additional addition B, the storage area of the "additional addition B flag". "1" is stored in.

The "additional addition C1 flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the type of the additional addition G number lottery is the additional addition C1, and when the type is the additional addition C1, the storage area of the "additional addition C1 flag". "1" is stored in. The "additional addition C2 flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the type of the additional addition G number lottery is the additional addition C2, and when the type is the additional addition C2, the storage area of the "additional addition C2 flag". "1" is stored in. The "additional addition C3 flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the type of the additional addition G number lottery is the additional addition C3, and when the type is the additional addition C3, the storage area of the "additional addition C3 flag". "1" is stored in. It should be noted that "1" is stored in the storage area of the "additional addition C3 flag" from the time when the additional addition C3 is determined until the start.

"CZ1 flag", "CZ2 flag", "SBB flag", "BB flag", "RB flag", "ART flag", "BR1 flag", "BR2 flag", "Additional addition A flag", "Additional addition" In each storage area of "B flag", "additional addition C1 flag", "additional addition C2 flag", and "additional addition C3 flag", the execution of the corresponding effect (transition to the corresponding state) is actually determined. "1" is stored until it starts in.

Further, the sub storage area also has a storage area of "CZ1 precursor flag", "CZ2 precursor flag", "BB precursor flag", "RB precursor flag", "ART precursor flag" and "BR precursor flag".

The "CZ1 precursor flag" is a flag indicating whether or not it is in the precursor of CZ1, and if it is in the precursor of CZ1, "1" is stored in the storage area of the "CZ1 precursor flag". The "CZ2 precursor flag" is a flag indicating whether or not it is in the precursor of CZ2, and if it is in the precursor of CZ2, "1" is stored in the storage area of the "CZ2 precursor flag".

The "BB precursor flag" is a flag indicating whether or not it is in the precursor of BB (SBB), and if it is in the precursor of BB (SBB), "1" is stored in the storage area of the "BB precursor flag". It is stored. The "RB precursor flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the RB precursor is in progress, and if the RB precursor flag is in progress, "1" is stored in the storage area of the "RB precursor flag".

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the pseudo-bonus has been won, one of "SBB", "BB" and "RB" is determined as the type of the pseudo-bonus. However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, when it is determined that the pseudo-bonus is won, only whether or not to set the type to "RB" is determined, and if it is determined not to be "RB", At the end of the BB precursor, a lottery may be made as to whether the pseudo-bonus is "SBB" or "BB".

The "ART precursor flag" is a flag indicating whether or not it is in the precursor of ART (second ART), and if it is in the precursor of ART, "1" is stored in the storage area of the "ART precursor flag". It is stored. Further, the "BR precursor flag" is a flag indicating whether or not it is in the precursor of BR, and if it is in the precursor of BR, "1" is stored in the storage area of the "BR precursor flag".

Further, the sub storage area has a storage area of "SBB preparing flag", "BB preparing flag", "RB preparing flag", and "ART preparing flag".

The "SBB preparing flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the SBB is being prepared, and if the SBB is being prepared, "1" is stored in the storage area of the "SBB preparing flag". The "BB preparing flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the BB is being prepared. If the BB is being prepared, "1" is stored in the storage area of the "BB preparing flag".

The "RB preparing flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the RB is being prepared. If the RB is being prepared, "1" is stored in the storage area of the "RB preparing flag". The "ART preparing flag" is a flag indicating whether or not ART is being prepared, and if ART is being prepared, "1" is stored in the storage area of the "ART preparing flag".

In the present embodiment, "preparing" means a section in which it is conceptually determined to start a predetermined state, but the start condition cannot be satisfied and the start cannot be started. During preparation, it resembles aura, but unlike aura, it actively encourages the start conditions. For example, when the occurrence of ART is determined, it is necessary to make AT and RT co-occur in order to start ART. Since the AT is managed by the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9), it can be started immediately, but the RT is managed by the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8). However, since communication from the sub control circuit 101 to the main control circuit 91 is not possible, in general, RT is indirectly performed by performing "AT for satisfying the RT start condition by the main control circuit 91". Prompt the start of. That is, in general, the period of difference that occurs between the start timing of AT by the sub control circuit 101 and the start timing of RT by the main control circuit 91 is a section called preparation.

Therefore, if the determination of the end condition of the ART is started at the start of the AT, the period during which only the AT operates is included in the period of the ART. Therefore, in some cases, the ART does not occur and the ART is performed. The period may end. Such a game machine makes the player uncomfortable and makes design and development difficult because the ART period assumed at the time of development (when the end condition is set) differs from the actual ART period. It is also a factor. Therefore, during the period from the start of AT to the satisfaction of the RT (main control circuit 91 side) condition, the AT is performed, but the ART end condition is not determined, so that this section is set as the ART period. Do not include it. Since this section is a section for which ART is being prepared, this section is referred to as "preparing" in the present specification.

In addition, the sub storage area includes "CZ game number counter", "pseudo-bonus game number counter", "ART game number counter", "BR game number counter", "additional game number counter", and "additional game number counter". ”Has a storage area.

The value of the "CZ game number counter" is added with "1" each time a game is played in CZ1 or CZ2, and the value of the "CZ game number counter" is cleared when CZ1 or CZ2 ends. The number of games (“30”, “60” or “100”) set according to the type of the pseudo-bonus is set in the “pseudo-bonus game number counter” before the pseudo-bonus is started.

Then, the value of the "counter for the number of games during the pseudo-bonus" is subtracted by "1" each time the game is played in the first ART (pseudo-bonus). When the numerical value is stored in the storage area of the "BB medium-high probability counter" described later, the subtraction of the "pseudo-bonus game number counter" is stopped.

The "ART game number counter" is set to "50" before the second ART is started. Then, the value of the "ART game number counter" is subtracted by "1" each time a game is played in the second ART. The "BR game number counter" is set to "10" before BR1 or BR2 is started. Then, the value of the "BR game number counter" is subtracted by "1" each time a game is played in BR1 or BR2.

"2" is set in the "counter for the number of additional additional games" before the game related to the additional additional effect is started. Then, the value of the "counter for the number of additional additional games" is subtracted by "1" each time the game related to the additional additional effect is performed.

The "additional game number counter" is provided as a temporary storage counter until the total number of additional games is determined when the additional addition is performed. Therefore, each time the number of additional games is determined in the additional addition, the determined number of additional games is added to the value of the "additional game number counter".

In addition, the sub storage area is "CI (cut-in) number counter in CZ", "BB medium and high probability counter", "precursor game number counter", "preparing digestion G number counter", "internal point counter", " It has a storage area for "causal value counter" and "causal value stock counter".

The "CI count counter in CZ" is set to "4" before CZ1 is started and "10" is set before CZ2 is started. Then, the value of the "CI count counter in CZ" is subtracted by "1" each time the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" (cut-in effect) occurs.

When the number of additional Gs related to the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined by the lottery for adding the number of Gs in BB, the determined number of additional Gs is added to the "BB medium-high probability counter". When the numerical value is stored in the storage area of the "BB medium-high probability counter", the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is in the high probability state. In the high probability state in the first ART, the probability that the winning of the second ART is determined is higher than that in the normal first ART.

The number of precursor games in each precursor is set in the "precursor game counter" before each precursor is started. Then, the value of the "precursor game number counter" is subtracted by "1" each time the game is played in each precursor. "1" is added to the value of "Preparing digestion G number counter" every time a game is played during each preparation, and the value of "Preparing digestion G number counter" is cleared when each preparation is completed. ..

When the internal point is determined by the internal point lottery, the value of the determined internal point is added to the "internal point counter". When the "causal value" is determined based on the total of the internal points and the "provisional causal value", the value determined as the "causal value" is subtracted from the value of the "internal point counter".

When the "causal value" is determined by the causal value lottery, the determined "causal value" is added to the "causal value counter". When the value of the "causal value counter" exceeds "100", "100" is subtracted from the value of the "causal value counter" and "1" is added to the value of the "causal value stock counter". The “causal value counter” and the “causal value stock counter” indicate a specific example of the causal value accumulating means according to the gaming machine of the present invention.

Further, the sub storage area includes a storage area of the "BR continuation flag", a "BR continuous storage area", and "BR stock storage area 1" to "BR stock storage area 32".

The "BR continuation flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the next set of BR1 or BR2 is started, and when it is determined that the next set of BR1 or BR2 is started, the "BR continuation flag" is used. "1" is stored in the storage area of.

The "BR continuous storage area one after another" is an area in which data indicating whether or not BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another is stored. When it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another, "1" is stored in the "BR one after another continuous storage area".

In the present embodiment, a special BR continuous lottery is performed separately from the BR continuous lottery. When the special BR continuation is won in the special BR continuation lottery, it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues until the set one after another. Further, when it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another, a special effect for notifying whether or not the special BR is "continued" is performed.

The "BR stock storage area 1" to the "BR stock storage area 32" are areas in which data indicating whether or not the execution of BR1 or BR2 is determined is stored. When the execution of BR1 is determined, "1" is stored in any of "BR stock storage area 1" to "BR stock storage area 32". When the execution of BR2 is determined, "2" is stored in any of "BR stock storage area 1" to "BR stock storage area 32".

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 78 to 99, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 by using the program will be described.

[Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the main flowchart (hereinafter referred to as the main flow) shown in FIG. 78.

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and the initialization process corresponding to the determination result is performed.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the main CPU 93 clears the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95. The designated storage area referred to here is, for example, a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area, which requires data to be erased for each game.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal reception / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor and the start switch 64 is checked. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95 (S4). Next, the main CPU 93 extracts an effect random value used for reel effect and lock control in the "continuous lock state", and stores the extracted effect random value in the effect random value storage area (non-function) provided in the main RAM 95. Stored in (shown) (S5). In the present embodiment, the effect random value 1, the effect random value 2, and the effect random value 3 are provided as the effect random values. Each of the effect random values 1 to 3 is extracted from the range of 0 to 65535.

Then, when the extracted various random number values are stored in the predetermined random number value storage area, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a game lock lottery process (S7). The details of the game lock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the reel stop initial setting process (S8). The details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a start command transmission process (S9). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a start command to the sub control circuit 101. The start command is configured to include parameters for specifying an internal winning combination and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lock process at the start of the game (S10). In this process, the reel effect performed in the "continuous lock state" determined in the process of S7 and the reel effect and lock at the start of the game corresponding to the type of lock are mainly executed. The details of the lock process at the start of the game will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs weight processing (S11). In this process, if a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main CPU 93 consumes the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, three stepping motors (not shown) are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 99 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Controlled, the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, and then is controlled so that the constant speed is maintained.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process (S14). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 stores the data of the symbol code storage area (symbol code storage area 2 and later in FIG. 45) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41). Further, in this process, the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R are stopped, and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15). To collate. Then, the main CPU 93 may determine whether or not the display combination is displayed on the effective line, and store the determination result in the display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a medal payout process (S16). The medal payout process shows a specific example of the game medium giving means according to the present invention. In this process, the hopper device 43 is driven, the number of credits is updated, and medals are paid out based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S15. At this time, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15), the number of medals inserted is three, and the number of medals to be paid out varies depending on the display combination, but the maximum number of medals to be paid out is three. The number of medals (upper limit of payout) is 14.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs RT control processing (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 manages the RT game state. The details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a payout end command transmission process (S18). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a payout end command to the sub control circuit 101.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end check process (S19). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to various counters for managing the end timing of the bonus game, and checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation check process (S20). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to perform the replay. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 described later. When the bonus operation check process is completed, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S2 and repeats the processes after S2.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic input request (S31). The presence or absence of this automatic closing request is performed by determining whether or not the automatic closing counter is "0". That is, when the automatic closing counter is "0", the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic closing request, and when the automatic closing counter is "1" or more, it determines that there is an automatic closing request.

The automatic input counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination related to the re-game is established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

In S31, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is an automatic closing request (when the determination in S31 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the automatic closing process (S32). In this process, the value of the automatic input counter is copied to the input number counter, and then the value of the automatic input counter is cleared. After that, the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

On the other hand, in S31, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic insertion request (when the determination in S31 is NO), the main CPU 93 permits the medal acceptance (S33). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 46 (see FIGS. 3 and 7) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 13 are accepted. The accepted medals are counted and then guided to the hopper device 43.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S34). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of input sheets to "3".

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S35). When it is determined in S35 that the main CPU 93 is not permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S35 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S35 that the medal acceptance is permitted (when the determination in S35 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the medal insertion check process (S36). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medals have been inserted, and adds "1" to the inserted number counter when the medals are inserted.

Next, the main CPU 93 transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control circuit 101 (S37). The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of inserted medals and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (S38). In S38, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S38 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35. On the other hand, in S38, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S38 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

After the processing of S32, if S35 determines NO or S38 determines YES, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch 64 is ON (S39). In S39, when the main CPU 93 determines that the start switch 64 is not on (when the determination in S39 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35.

On the other hand, in S39, when the main CPU 93 determines that the start switch 64 is ON (when the determination in S39 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S40). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 46 (see FIGS. 3 and 7) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 18. When this process is completed, the main CPU 93 ends the medal acceptance / start check process and shifts the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described. In the present embodiment, the internal lottery process using various internal lottery tables described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means for executing the internal lottery process (internal winning combination determining means).

First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table according to the game state (S41). That is, the main CPU 93 grasps the current game state with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), and determines the type of the internal lottery table and the number of lottery times based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 18). decide. The number of lottery indicates the number of times for each winning number specified by the internal lottery table to subtract the lottery value and determine whether or not a digit has occurred.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lottery value change process (S42). In this process, the lottery value of the winning number related to the re-game is changed according to the game state. The details of the lottery value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the random number value stored in the random number value storage area (S43). Then, the main CPU 93 sets "1" as the initial value of the winning number.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table to acquire the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S44).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S44 is less than 0 (negative value) (S45).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S45 that the calculation result is not less than 0 (when the determination in S45 is NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (S46). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets the value of the calculation result as a random value and adds 1 to the winning number.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S47). When it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 93 has not checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S47 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S44 and repeats the processes after S44.

On the other hand, in S47, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S47 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the data pointer (S48). That is, the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

Here, returning to the description of the process of S45 again, when the main CPU 93 determines in S45 that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (when the determination in S45 is YES), the main CPU 93 is currently The data pointer for small win / replay and the data pointer for bonus are acquired according to the winning number of (S49).

Then, after the processing of S48 or S49, the main CPU 93 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 25 to 28), and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small winning combination / replay data pointer. (S50).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S51).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (S52). In S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is not "00000000000" (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S55 described later.

On the other hand, in S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 93 uses the bonus internal winning combination determination table ( Refer to FIG. 24) to acquire the internal winning combination based on the bonus data pointer (S53).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carrying-over combination storage area (S54).

After the processing of S54 or when the determination in S52 is NO, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area (S55).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the CB gaming state (S56). When the main CPU 93 determines in S56 that it is not in the CB gaming state (when the determination in S56 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process and shifts the process to S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 78). ..

On the other hand, in S56, when the main CPU 93 determines that the CB gaming state is in progress (when the determination in S56 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on all the bits corresponding to the small winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (when the determination in S56 is YES). S57). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process, and shifts the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Lottery price change process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the lottery value changing process performed in S42 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 80) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) to determine whether or not the RT game state flag is on (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is set in any of bits 0 to 4 in the game state flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 42). Then, when the main CPU 93 determines in S61 that the RT game state flag is not on (when the determination in S61 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value change process and performs the process by the internal lottery process (see FIG. 80). ) Move to S43.

On the other hand, in S61, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT game state flag is ON (when the determination in S61 is YES), the main CPU 93 is the RT internal lottery table corresponding to the RT game state that is turned on. With reference to, the lottery value of the winning numbers (“1” to “24”) related to the re-game of the internal lottery table for the general game state (see FIG. 19) is changed (S62). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value changing process, and shifts the process to S43 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 80).

[Game lock lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the game lock lottery process performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described. The game lock lottery process shows a specific example of the lock lottery means according to the game machine of the present invention.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S71). In S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S71 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to S8.

On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S71 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the game lock lottery table (see FIG. 39) for production. A game lock lottery is performed based on the random number value 1 (S72).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the game lock has been won in the game lock lottery of S72 (S73). In S73, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game lock has not been won (when the determination in S73 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process and performs the process in S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to.

On the other hand, in S73, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game lock has been won (when the determination in S73 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the game lock flag and the lock timer (S74). As a result, the game lock is generated. That is, the process of S74 shows a specific example of the lock generating means according to the game machine of the present invention. Then, after the processing of S74, the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described with reference to FIG. 83.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the rotation cylinder stop number selection table (see FIG. 29), and acquires the rotation cylinder stop number based on the internal winning combination acquired in the internal lottery process of S6 in FIG. 78. (S101).

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIGS. 30 and 31), and acquires various information corresponding to the reel stop number based on the acquired reel stop number (S102). .. Specifically, the main CPU 93 has a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, and forward push corresponding to the acquired rotation stop number. The initial data for changing the time table and the table selection data for irregular pressing are acquired.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier "0FFH (11111111B)" in the entire symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) (S103).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores "3" in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 95 (S104). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and shifts the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). The stop button non-operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has not been detected.

[Lock processing at the start of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the game start lock process performed in S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described. The lock process at the start of the game shows a first specific example of the locking effect determining means according to the game machine of the present invention.

First, the main CPU 93 sets a reel effect pattern according to the game lock flag (S111). The reel effect pattern corresponding to the game lock flag of the present embodiment is data for reel effect in which a time retrogression reel action (before the stop operation) and a time retrogression reel action (after the stop operation) are set as one set. When this reel effect pattern is set, the time for one set is set in the lock timer.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the lock timer is "0" (S112). In S112, when the main CPU 93 determines that the lock timer value is not "0" (when the determination in S112 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S112 until the lock timer value becomes "0". stand by.

When the reel effect pattern during the game lock is a time-traveling reel action (before the stop operation), the same process as the rotation process (acceleration process) in which the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated forward in order to perform a normal game is performed. Will be done. As a result, when the reel effect pattern during game lock is a time-traveling reel action, it is the same as the reel action from the start operation to the activation of the stop button when performing a normal game. .. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether or not the game lock has occurred immediately after the start operation (lever on). Further, when the reel effect pattern is a time-traveling reel action (after the stop operation), a rotation process for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the reverse direction is performed.

A reel effect pattern corresponding to the game lock flag is set, and when a certain time elapses after the time retrogression reel action (before the stop operation) is executed, the time retrogression reel action (after the stop operation) is started. That is, after the rotation process of rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the forward direction is performed for a certain period of time, the rotation process of rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the reverse direction is performed thereafter.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game lock is started, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate (time retrogression reel action (before the stop operation)) as in a normal game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether or not the game lock has been generated immediately after the start operation, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that the game lock has occurred.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a fixed time during which the time-traveling reel action (before the stop operation) is performed, the time from the tilting operation of the start lever 16 to the stop operation (the start operation is performed) in a normal game. The time is set a little longer than the time from when it is done until the stop button is activated). As a result, if the player performs the stop operation immediately after the time until the stop button is activated has elapsed, the player can have the illusion that the game lock has occurred immediately after the stop operation.

As a result, if it is thought that the normal game has been started based on the detection of the start operation (lever on), the player can be made to recognize (misidentify) that the game lock has suddenly occurred, and the game lock is related to the game lock. The effect can be enhanced. Also, although I think that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will stop due to the stop operation, the stop operation is actually disabled and the time-traveling reel action (after the stop operation) is executed, which is a big surprise to the player. It can be felt and the fun of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, in S112, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the lock timer is "0" (when the determination in S112 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the lock process at the start of the game and performs the process in the main flow (when the game starts. (See FIG. 78).

[Pull-in priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the pull-in priority storage process performed in S13 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 stores the stop button non-operation counter as the number of searches in the main RAM 95 (S121). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a search target reel determination process (S122). In this process, the main CPU 93 selects a predetermined reel from, for example, a rotating reel, and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

For example, in S122, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. After that, various processes up to S131 described later are performed on the left reel 3L, and when returning to S122 again, the middle reel 3C is next determined as the search target reel. Then, various processes up to S131 described later are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when returning to S122 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as the search target reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S123). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (small winning combination / replay data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the symbol position data and sets "21" as the number of symbol checks (S124). Then, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code storage process (S125). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data located on the valid line (winning determination line) of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, the symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. The details of the symbol code storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41) based on the acquired symbol code and the data of the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) (S126). At this point, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storage area based on the stopped symbol regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination is won.

In the present embodiment, the information of the symbol code storage area (the symbol code and the corresponding displayable combination) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable winning combination may be acquired from the data that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable winning combination, or the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15) may be collated and acquired. When the former method is used, the correspondence between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S127). In this process, the main CPU 93 gives priority to the combination in which the bit is "1" in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41) and the bit is "1" in the internal winning combination storage area. The attraction priority data is acquired by referring to the ranking table (see FIG. 37).

In addition, when the symbols of the winning combination (“C_B_CH_A” to “C_B_CH_D”, “C_C_CH” shown in FIG. 15) related to the winning combination (for example, “cherry”) are displayed on some reels, “ In the reel that becomes "ANY", the attraction priority data of the combination is not acquired. In addition, if there is a possibility that a winning combination that has not been won internally will be determined on the reel for which the winning is confirmed, the attraction priority data is set to "stop prohibited (all bits 0)".

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (see FIG. 46) (S128). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other. Next, the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the symbol position data and subtracts 1 from the symbol check count (S129).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is 0 (S130). When the main CPU 93 determines in S130 that the number of symbol checks is not 0 (when the determination in S130 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S125 and repeats the processes after S125.

On the other hand, in S130, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of symbol checks is 0 (when the determination in S130 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches (S131).

When it is determined in S131 that the main CPU 93 has not searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S131 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S122 and repeats the processes after S122. On the other hand, when it is determined in S131 that the main CPU 93 has searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S131 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority storage process and performs the process in S14 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the attraction priority table selection process performed in S123 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 85) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the attraction-in priority table number is set, that is, whether or not the attraction-in priority table number is directly stored in the reel stop initial setting process (S8) (S141). ). When the main CPU 93 determines in S141 that the attraction priority table number is set (when the determination in S141 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection process and stores the process in the attraction priority order. The process moves to S124 of the process (see FIG. 85).

On the other hand, in S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority table number is not set (when the determination in S141 is NO), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 44) and the operation stop button. Refer to the area (see FIG. 43) and set the corresponding pull-in priority table number (S142). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection process, and shifts the process to S124 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 85).

In S142, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area, and acquires the data of the pressing order and the operation stop button. Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the attraction priority table selection table corresponding to the attraction priority table selection data, and acquires the attraction priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. After that, the main CPU 93 sets the acquired pull-in priority table number.

[Design code acquisition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the symbol code acquisition process performed in S125 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 85) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets the valid line data (S151). In the present embodiment, as the effective line (winning determination line), one line (center line) is provided as described above. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S152). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire the information of the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data (S153). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the symbol code storage process, and shifts the process to S126 of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 85).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S14 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In this embodiment, the reel stop control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means (stop control means) for executing the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S161). When the main CPU 93 determines in S161 that the valid stop button has not been pressed (when the determination in S161 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S161 to execute the pressing operation of the valid stop button. Wait until.

On the other hand, in S161, when the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (when the determination in S161 is YES), the main CPU 93 has a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 44) and an operation stop button storage area (FIG. 43) is updated (S162). Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S163).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S164). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S165).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S166). The details of the sliding piece number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 101 (S167). The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of slip pieces thereof, and the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch. The ON edge / OFF edge information of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later, and the information may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S166, and stores the determined stop scheduled position in the main RAM 95 (S168). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and sets the result as the stop scheduled position.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the scheduled stop position determined in S168 as the search symbol position (S169). Next, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 87 (S170). After that, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) using the acquired symbol code (S171).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S172). The details of the control change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is released (S173). When the main CPU 93 determines in S173 that the pressed stop button has not been released (when the determination in S173 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S173 and waits until the pressed stop button is released. To do.

On the other hand, in S173, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button has been released (when the determination in S173 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S174). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 101. At this time, the data structure of the reel stop command to be transmitted is the same as that of the reel stop command transmitted in S167. However, the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S174 is different from the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S167.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is "0" (S175). When the main CPU 93 determines in S175 that the inactive counter is not "0" (when the determination in S175 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the pull-in priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 85 (S176). ). After that, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S161 and repeats the processes after S161.

On the other hand, in S175, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inactive counter is "0" (when the determination in S175 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 78). (See), move to S15.

[Sliding piece number determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the slip piece number determination process performed in S166 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 selects the line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on the line mask data table (not shown) (S181). In this process, for example, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the main CPU 93 sets “1000000” as line mask data in the bit 7 corresponding to the “left reel A line” of the stop data. Select. Further, for example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects "00010000" in which "1" is set in the bit 4 corresponding to the "middle reel A line" of the stop data as the line mask data. To do. Further, for example, when the right stop button 17R is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects "00000010" in which "1" is set in bit 1 corresponding to the "right reel A line" of the stop data as line mask data. To do.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the first stop (the stop button non-operation counter is "2") (S182). When the main CPU 93 determines in S182 that it is not the first stop (when the determination in S182 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the second and third stop processes (S183). The details of the second and third stop processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 performs the process of S191 described later.

On the other hand, in S182, when the main CPU 93 determines that the first stop is performed (when the determination in S182 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the operation stop button is the left stop button (S184).

In S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (when the determination in S184 is YES), the main CPU 93 acquires the table selection data and the symbol counter at the time of forward pressing (S185). In this process, the table selection data at the time of forward pressing is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIGS. 30 and 31). Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the forward-pressed first stop stop table corresponding to the forward-pressed table selection data, and acquires the slip piece number determination data and the change status based on the symbol counter (S186). After that, the main CPU 93 performs the process of S191 described later.

On the other hand, in S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when the determination in S184 is NO), the main CPU 93 acquires the irregular pressing table selection data and selects the irregular pressing table. An irregular push stop table corresponding to the data is set (S187). In this process, the irregular pressing table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIGS. 30 and 31).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line change bit check process (S188). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line mask data change process (S189). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 refers to the set irregular push stop table, and acquires the number of slip pieces determination data based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S190).

After the processing of S183, S186 or S190, the main CPU 93 performs the priority pull-in control processing (S191). In this process, the pull-in priority data is compared according to each symbol position in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" from the stop start position, and the most appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined. The details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 ends the sliding piece number determination process, and shifts the process to S167 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the second and third stop processes performed in S183 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is during the second stop operation (S201). When the main CPU 93 determines in S201 that it is not during the second stop operation (when the determination in S201 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S204 described later.

On the other hand, in S201, when the main CPU 93 determines that the second stop operation is in progress (when the determination in S201 is YES), the main CPU 93 pushes the stop button forward (the first stop is the left reel 3L). It is determined whether or not it is (S202). In S202, when the main CPU 93 determines that the push is not forward (when the determination in S202 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S204 described later.

On the other hand, in S202, when the main CPU 93 determines that the push is forward (when the determination in S202 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the line change bit check process (S203). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line mask data change process (S204). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number search process (S205). In this process, the slip piece number determination data is determined based on the stop start position with reference to the stop tables (FIGS. 32, 34 and 35).

For example, when the line mask data is "00010000" corresponding to the "middle reel A line", the main CPU 93 refers to the column of the "middle reel A line" of the bit 4. Then, for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces from the stop start position, a search for whether or not the corresponding data is "1" is sequentially performed. Next, the main CPU 93 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is "1" to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as the slip piece number determination data. Then, after the processing of S205, the main CPU 93 ends the second and third stop processing, and shifts the processing to S191 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the line change bit performed in S188 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89) and S203 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90). The check process will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the change status is "1" or "2" (S211). In S211 when the main CPU 93 determines that the change status is "1" or "2" (when the determination in S211 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding line status (S212). In this process, in the present embodiment, the A-line status is set when the change status is "1", and the B-line status is set when the change status is "2". Then, after the processing of S212, the main CPU 93 finishes the line change bit check processing, and performs the processing in S189 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) Moves to the processing of S204.

On the other hand, in S211 when the main CPU 93 determines that the change status is not "1" or "2" (when the determination in S211 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the line change bit is on. (S213). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the column corresponding to the "middle reel line change bit" or "right reel line change bit" in the stop table (see FIGS. 34 and 35), and the data corresponding to the stop start position is obtained. It is determined whether or not it is "1". Then, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not "1", that is, the line change bit is not on (when the determination in S213 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the line change bit check process. Is completed, and the process is transferred to S189 of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89) or S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90).

On the other hand, in S213, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is "1", that is, the line change bit is ON (when the determination in S213 is YES), the main CPU 93 is B. Set the line status (S214). The B line status is data used to change the line mask data. Then, after the processing of S214, the main CPU 93 finishes the line change bit check processing, and performs the processing in S189 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) Moves to the processing of S204.

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the line mask data performed in S189 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89) and S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90). The change process will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the C line status is set (S221). It should be noted that the C-line status is set when the forward push is performed in the second post-stop control change process (see FIG. 95) described later.

In S221, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line status is set (when the determination in S221 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button. Determine (S222).

In S222, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button (when the determination in S222 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the right twice (S223). ). If the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button in the forward push, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the right stop button. Therefore, the process of S223 changes the line mask data from "00000010" to "10000000". As a result, the column of bits 7 corresponding to the "right reel C line data" of the second and third stop tables (see FIG. 35) at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S223, the main CPU 93 finishes the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) Move to the process of S205.

On the other hand, in S222, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button (when the determination in S222 is NO), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the left twice. (S224). If the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button in the forward push, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the middle stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from "00010000" to "01000000" by the processing of S224. As a result, the column of bits 6 corresponding to the "middle reel C line data" of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S224, the main CPU 93 finishes the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) Move to the process of S205.

Further, in S221, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line status is not set (when the determination in S221 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the B line status is set (S225). .. When the main CPU 93 determines in S225 that the B line status is not set (when the determination in S225 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change process and performs the process of determining the number of sliding pieces (FIG. FIG. Move to the process of S190 in (see 89) or S205 in the flowchart (see FIG. 90) of the second and third stop processes.

On the other hand, in S225, when the main CPU 93 determines that the B line status is set (when the determination in S225 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the right once (S226). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is "00000010", it is changed to "00000001". As a result, the column corresponding to "B line data" in the stop table (see FIGS. 34 and 35) is referenced. Then, after the processing of S226, the main CPU 93 finishes the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) Move to the process of S205.

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the priority pull-in control process performed in S191 in the flowchart (see FIG. 89) of the slide piece number determination process will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets a search order table (see FIG. 38) according to the game state (S231). Next, the main CPU 93 sets initial values in the search order counter and the number of checks (S232). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets "1" as an initial value in the search order counter. Further, the main CPU 93 sets the data length of the search order table as an initial value for the number of checks. Specifically, "5" is set as the initial value of the number of checks.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the start address of the stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the slip piece number determination data (S233).

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the number of slip pieces corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S234). Next, the main CPU 93 adds the acquired number of slip pieces to the expected address at the start of stopping, and acquires the attraction priority data (S235).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the attraction priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the attraction priority data acquired earlier (S236). In S236, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S235 does not exceed the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S236 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S238 described later. Do.

On the other hand, in S236, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S236 is YES), the main CPU 93 slips acquired in S234. The number of pieces is evacuated (S237).

Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the number of checks and adds 1 to the search order counter (S238).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of checks is "0" (S239). In S239, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is not "0" (when the determination in S239 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S234 and repeats the processes after S234.

On the other hand, in S239, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S239 is YES), the main CPU 93 restores the number of retracted sliding pieces (S240). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the priority pull-in control process and also ends the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89).

[Control change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the control change process performed in S172 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is after the third stop (S251). When the main CPU 93 determines in S251 that it is after the third stop (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process and performs the process in S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88). Move to.

On the other hand, in S251, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not after the third stop (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is after the second stop (S252). In S252, when the main CPU 93 determines that it has been after the second stop (when the determination in S252 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the control process after the second stop (S253). The details of the control process after the second stop will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 described later. Then, after the processing of S253, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 88).

On the other hand, in S252, when the main CPU 93 determines that it has not been after the second stop (when the determination in S252 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the push is forward (S254). When the main CPU 93 determines in S254 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S254 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process and shifts the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88). ..

On the other hand, in S254, when the main CPU 93 determines that the forward push is performed (when the determination in S254 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the forward push control change table according to the forward push table change data (see FIG. 33). Is acquired and the number of searches is set (S255).

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the scheduled stop position (S256). Then, the main CPU 93 updates the change target position according to the acquired scheduled stop position (S257).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the change target position updated in S257 matches the scheduled stop position (S258). In S258, when the main CPU 93 determines that the updated position to be changed does not match the scheduled stop position (when the determination in S258 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of searches is "0". (S259). When the main CPU 93 determines in S259 that the number of searches is not "0" (when the determination in S259 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S257 and repeats the processes after S257.

On the other hand, in S259, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of searches is "0" (when the determination in S259 is YES), the main CPU 93 changes the table at the time of forward pressing. It is acquired as the third stop table number for stop, and the corresponding stop table is set (S260).

Next, the main CPU 93 sets “0” in the C line check data (S261). Then, after the processing of S261, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 88).

Further, in S258, when the main CPU 93 determines that the updated position to be changed matches the scheduled stop position (when the determination in S258 is YES), the main CPU 93 is the second when the forward press is performed according to the value of the line change status. -Obtain the third stop table number and C line check data (S262).

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding stop table based on the second and third stop table numbers at the time of forward pressing (S263). Then, after the processing of S263, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 88).

[Control change processing after the second stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the second post-stop control change process performed in S253 in the flowchart of the control change process (see FIG. 94) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the push is forward (S271). When the main CPU 93 determines in S271 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S271 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop, and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 94). To do.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the main CPU 93 is pushing forward (when the determination in S271 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the C line check data is on (whether the change status is "3") or not. (S272). The C-line check data is acquired by the process of S262 of the control change process (see FIG. 94). Then, in S272, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line check data is not on (when the determination in S272 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop and controls change process (FIG. FIG. 94) also ends.

On the other hand, in S272, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line check data is on (when the determination in S272 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop. It is determined whether or not it is (S273). In S273, when the main CPU 93 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is not on (when the determination in S273 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop. At the same time, the control change process (see FIG. 94) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S273, when the main CPU 93 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is on (when the determination in S273 is YES), the main CPU 93 is at the time of the stored forward pressing. "1" is added to the second and third stop table numbers, and the corresponding stop table is set (S274). Next, the main CPU 93 sets the C line status (S275). Then, after the process of S275, the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop, and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 94).

[RT control processing]
Next, the RT control process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described with reference to FIG. 96. In this embodiment, the RT control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) and checks the transition conditions of the RT gaming state that can be established in the RT gaming state of the migration source (current) (S281).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (S282). In S282, when the main CPU 93 determines that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is not satisfied (when the determination in S282 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S284 described later.

On the other hand, in S282, when the main CPU 93 determines that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (when the determination in S282 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) and shifts. Based on the conditions, the RT game state flag of the migration destination is set to a predetermined bit of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), and the game state flag storage area is updated (S283).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a display command transmission process (S284). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a display command to the sub control circuit 101. The display command is configured to include parameters for specifying the display combination, the number of payouts, and the like. Then, after the processing of S284, the main CPU 93 ends the RT control processing and shifts the processing to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, the bonus end check process performed in S19 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described with reference to FIG. 97.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the “MB” (“MB1” or “MB2”) is operating with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) (S321). In S321, when the main CPU 93 determines that "MB" is not operating (when the determination in S321 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and performs the process in S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to.

On the other hand, in S321, when the main CPU 93 determines that "MB" is in operation (when the determination in S321 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0". Is determined (S322).

In S322, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (when the determination in S322 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the bonus end processing (S323). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter and turns off the game state flag (MB game state flag) corresponding to the operating "MB". If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0", it means that the payout of medals exceeds 13 during the MB game state.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end command transmission process (S324). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a bonus end command to the sub control circuit 101. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of the bonus (S325). Then, after the processing of S325, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing, and shifts the processing to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

On the other hand, in S322, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (when the determination in S322 is NO), the main CPU 93 sets each value of the winning count counter and the playable count counter. Update (S326). The value of the winning count counter is subtracted by "1" when a small winning combination (a winning combination with a medal payout) is displayed, and the value of the gameable count counter is "1" in one game regardless of the stop symbol. It is subtracted.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter or the playable number counter is “0” (S327). In S327, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the winning count counter or the value of the playable count counter is not "0" (when the determination in S327 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process. , The process is transferred to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

On the other hand, in S327, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the winning count counter or the value of the playable count counter is "0" (when the determination in S327 is YES), the main CPU 93 processes at the end of CB. (S328). Specifically, processing such as turning off the game status flag (CB game status flag) corresponding to "CB", clearing the values of the winning counter and the game counter is performed. After that, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and shifts the process to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, the bonus operation check process performed in S20 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described with reference to FIG. 98.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the "MB" ("MB1" or "MB2") is in operation (S331). When the main CPU 93 determines in S331 that "MB" is not operating (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S334 described later.

On the other hand, in S331, when the main CPU 93 determines that "MB" is in operation (when the determination in S331 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "CB" is in operation (S332). ). In S332, when the main CPU 93 determines that "CB" is in operation (when the determination in S332 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S332, when the main CPU 93 determines that "CB" is not operating (when the determination in S332 is NO), the main CPU 93 processes during CB operation based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 16). (S333). Then, after the processing of S333, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

Further, when the determination in S331 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the bonus game is a prize (S334). In the present embodiment, the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to "C_MB1" or "C_MB2" is the winning of the bonus game. In S334, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus game is not a prize (when the determination in S334 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S338 described later.

On the other hand, in S334, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus game is a winning bonus (when the determination in S334 is YES), the main CPU 93 selects the winning bonus game based on the bonus operating table (see FIG. 16). The corresponding bonus operation time processing is performed (S335). In the present embodiment, in this process, the main CPU 93 sets "1" to the corresponding bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) with reference to the bonus operation time table (see FIG. 16). The value of the bonus end number counter is set to a predetermined value (“13”). Further, in this process, the CB operating process described in S333 is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carry-over combination storage area (S336). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start command transmission process (S337). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a bonus start command to the sub control circuit 101. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started. Then, after the processing of S337, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

Further, when the determination in S334 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning combination related to the replay is a prize (S338). In S338, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to the replay is not a prize (when the determination in S338 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S338, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to the replay is a prize (when the determination in S338 is YES), the main CPU 93 requests the automatic insertion of medals (S339). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the input number counter to the automatic input number counter. Then, after the processing of S339, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, for example, an interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 93 performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S341). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S342). In this process, signals input from various switches such as the stop switch of the stop switch board 65 are checked.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a timer update process (S343). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a communication data transmission procedure (S344). In this process, various commands are mainly transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 as appropriate.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel control process (S345). In this process, the main CPU 93 starts rotating the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when all the reels are requested to start rotating, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. It drives and controls three stepping motors. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 93 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the effective line (winning determination line) of the display window). , Drive and control the corresponding stepping motor so that the rotation of the corresponding reel is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S345, in addition to the above-mentioned normal acceleration processing, constant speed processing and stop processing, when a reel effect pattern is set at the time of acceleration processing, the reel effect pattern is supported. It also performs reel production (reel action) and lock control processing.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the lamp 7-segment drive process (S346). In this process, the main CPU 93 drives and controls the 7-segment display 23 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register reset process (S347). Then, after that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt process.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 115, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using the program will be described.

[Main board communication task]
First, the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 100.

First, the sub CPU 102 checks the reception of the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (S501). Next, when the sub CPU 102 receives the command, the sub CPU 102 extracts the type of the received command (S502).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the command type is normal (S503). In the present embodiment, the command type is associated with any of the plurality of types of codes, and when the game is operating normally, the command type is one of the plurality of types of codes. Therefore, in the process of S503, if the received command type code is any one of a plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is normal. On the other hand, when the command type code is other than the plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that some abnormality (including cheating) has occurred during the game, and determines that the command type is not a normal command type.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S503 that the command type is not normal (when the determination in S503 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S501 and repeats the processes after S501.

On the other hand, in S503, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is normal (when the determination in S503 is YES), the sub CPU 102 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command (S504). .. The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the processing of S504, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S501 and repeats the processing after S501.

[Direction registration task]
Next, the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 retrieves a message from the message queue (S511). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a message in the message queue (S512). In S512, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when the determination in S512 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S515 described later.

On the other hand, in S512, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is a message in the message queue (when the determination in S512 is YES), the sub CPU 102 copies the game information from the message (S513). In this process, for example, various data such as an internal winning combination, a type of reel whose rotation has stopped, a display combination, and a game state flag, which are specified by parameters, are copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 103. The reel.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect content determination process (S514). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect content, registers the effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. The details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the animation data (S515). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the sound data (S516). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the lamp data (S517). It should be noted that these registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process of S514. After the processing of S517, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S511 and repeats the processing after S511.

[Production content determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the effect content determination process performed in S514 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the start command is received (S521).

In S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the start command is received (YES in S521), the sub CPU 102 performs the start command reception process (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 102 extracts the effect random value, determines the effect number by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and registers the effect number. Here, the effect number is data that specifies the content of the effect to be executed this time. The details of the process at the time of receiving the start command will be described later with reference to FIG. 103 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data at the start according to the registered effect number (S523). The effect data is data that specifies animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered, the corresponding animation data and the like are determined, and the effect such as displaying an image is executed. Then, after the processing of S523, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

On the other hand, in S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the start command is received (when the determination in S521 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the reel stop command is received (S524).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S524 that the reel stop command has been received (YES in S524), the sub CPU 102 performs the reel stop command reception processing (S525). In this process, when the additional addition B flag is on, the sub CPU 102 performs an additional addition B addition G number lottery. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data at the time of stop according to the registered effect number and the type of the operation stop button (S526). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

On the other hand, in S524, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the reel stop command is received (when the determination in S524 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the display command is received (S527).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S527 that the display command is being received (when the determination in S527 is YES), the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data at the time of display according to the registered effect number and display combination. (S528). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

On the other hand, in S527, when it is determined that it is not the time when the display command is received (when the determination in S527 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the payout end command is received (S529). In S529, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the time when the payout end command is received (when the determination in S529 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process when the payout end command is received (S530). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

On the other hand, in S529, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the payout end command is received (when the determination in S529 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus start command is received (S531).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S531 that the bonus start command has been received (when the determination in S531 is YES), the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data for starting the bonus (S532). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

On the other hand, in S531, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the bonus start command is received (when the determination in S531 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus end command is received (S533). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S533 that the bonus end command has been received (when the determination in S533 is YES), the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data for the bonus end (S534). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

On the other hand, in S533, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the bonus end command is received (when the determination in S533 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the no-operation command is received (S535). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S535 that it is not the time when the no-operation command is received (when the determination in S535 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process and performs the process in the effect registration task (see FIG. 101). Move to S515.

On the other hand, in S535, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the non-operation command is received (YES in S535), the sub CPU 102 performs the non-operation command reception process (S536). The details of the non-operation command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 115 described later. After the processing of S536, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

[Processing when receiving start command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the process at the time of receiving the start command performed in S522 in the flowchart (see FIG. 102) of the effect content determination process will be described. In the present embodiment, the start command reception processing described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo-bonus is in progress (S541). During the pseudo-bonus (first ART), any one of the SBB flag, the BB flag, and the RB flag is on, and the BB precursor flag and the RB precursor flag are off.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S541 that the pseudo-bonus is in progress (when the determination in S541 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo-bonus processing (S542). The details of the pseudo-bonus processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 104 described later.

On the other hand, in S541, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus is not in progress (when the determination in S541 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub CPU 102 is in the ART (second ART) (S543). .. During ART (second ART), the ART (second ART) flag is on and the ART precursor flag is off.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S543 that the sub CPU 102 is in the ART (second ART) (when the determination in S543 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing during the ART (S544). The details of the processing during ART will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106 described later.

On the other hand, in S543, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub CPU 102 is not in the ART (second ART) (when the determination in S543 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a normal processing (S545). The details of the normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 described later.

After the processing of S542, S544 or S545, the sub CPU 102 performs the preparatory processing (S546). The details of this preparatory process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 described later. Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a precursor check process (S547). The details of the precursor check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 112 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect lottery process (S548). The details of the effect lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 described later. After the processing of S548, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command, and shifts the processing to S523 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 102).

[Processing during pseudo bonus]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the pseudo-bonus processing performed in S542 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the preparation flag of the pseudo bonus is on (S561). As the preparation flag of the pseudo bonus, as described above, the SBB preparation flag, the BB preparation flag, and the RB preparation flag are provided. Therefore, in S561, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the SBB preparing flag, the BB preparing flag, and the RB preparing flag is on.

In S561, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation flag of the pseudo bonus is on (when the determination in S561 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the start condition corresponding to each preparation flag is satisfied. Determine (S562). The start condition corresponding to the SBB preparing flag is that the winning number "18" (abbreviated as "F_W7_KP_RT4") wins in the internal lottery process. The start conditions corresponding to the BB preparation flag and the RB preparation flag are the winning numbers "14" to "17" (abbreviations "F_R7_KP_RB_0", "F_R7_KP_RB_1", "F_RB_KP_R7_0", "F_RB_KP_7") Either is a win.

In S562, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the start condition corresponding to each preparing flag is satisfied (when the determination in S562 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo-bonus start time process (S563).

In the pseudo-bonus start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the preparing flag corresponding to the started pseudo-bonus, and sets the counter for the number of games during the pseudo-bonus to the value (“100”, “60”, or the value corresponding to the started pseudo-bonus. "30") is set. Further, the sub CPU 102 clears the preparing digestion G number counter. Then, after the processing of S563, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the pseudo-bonus, and shifts the processing to S546 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103).

On the other hand, in S562, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the start condition corresponding to each preparing flag is not satisfied (when the determination in S562 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo-bonus processing and performs the processing. The process moves to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

Here, returning to S561 again, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S561 that the preparation flag of the pseudo bonus is not on (when the determination in S561 is NO), does the sub CPU 102 determine that the BB flag is on? Whether or not it is determined (S564). In S564, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB flag is not ON (when the determination in S564 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S570 described later.

On the other hand, in S564, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB flag is ON (when the determination in S564 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is in the BB based on the G number addition lottery table in the BB (see FIG. 54). The lottery process is performed by adding the number of G (S565). This G number addition lottery process in BB shows a specific example of the means for drawing the number of additional games in the assisted state according to the game machine of the present invention. In the BB medium G number addition lottery process, when the number of additional games is determined, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined value to the BB medium / high probability counter.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs ART lottery processing in BB based on the ART lottery table in BB (see FIG. 55), or BR lottery in BB based on the BR (battle rush) lottery table in BB (see FIG. 56). Process (S566). The ART lottery process in BB and the BR lottery process in BB show a first specific example of the benefit determining means according to the game machine of the present invention. Further, the ART lottery process in BB also serves as a first specific example of the assisted state lottery means according to the present invention.

Specifically, it is a non-ART BB, and a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to any of the winning numbers "7", "8", "10", and "11" by internal lottery processing). When is determined as the internal winning combination, the sub CPU 102 performs the ART lottery process during BB. In addition, it is a BB during ART, and a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to any of the winning numbers "7", "8", "10", and "11") is an internal winning combination by internal lottery processing. If it is determined as, the sub CPU 102 performs the BR lottery process.

When the "ART win" is determined in the ART lottery process during BB, the sub CPU 102 turns on the "ART flag" (stores "1" in the "ART flag"). Further, when the "battle rush 1 win" is determined in the BR lottery process during BB, the sub CPU 102 stores "1" in the "BR stock storage area". Then, when the "battle rush 2 win" is determined, the sub CPU 102 stores "2" in the "BR stock storage area".

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery result of S566 is the winning result (S567). That is, it is determined whether or not any of "ART win", "battle rush 1 win" and "battle rush 2 win" has been determined.

In S567, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning is won (when the determination in S567 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)" (S568). In addition, "reverse push" in this embodiment means that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left".

The above-mentioned special internal winning combination is an internal winning combination corresponding to any of the winning numbers (small winning combination / replay data pointers) "7", "8", "10", and "11". In the present embodiment, when the winning number (small winning combination / replay data pointer) is any of "7", "8", "10", and "11", the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, left, middle" or "11". The combination of symbols corresponding to any of "C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P" is stopped and displayed on condition that it is "right, middle, left".

When the combination of symbols corresponding to "C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P" is stopped and displayed, "white BAR"-"white BAR"-is along a straight line extending across the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. It is possible to stop and display the combination of "white BAR" symbols. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when any of "ART win", "Battle rush 1 win" and "Battle rush 2 win" is determined, "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)" is performed. ..

Perform the stop operation according to "Reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)", and the combination of "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR" symbols is stopped and displayed along the straight line. Then, the player can recognize that any one of "ART win", "Battle rush 1 win" and "Battle rush 2 win" has been decided. At this time, if it is a non-ART BB, "ART win" is determined, and if it is an ART BB, "Battle rush 1 win" or "Battle rush 2 win" is determined.

Even if the data pointer (winning number) for small role / replay is any of "7", "8", "10" and "11", "ART winning", "Battle rush 1 winning" and "" If none of "Battle Rush 2 Win" has been decided, "Reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)" is not performed. That is, even if the combination of "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR" can be stopped and displayed, any of "ART win", "battle rush 1 win" and "battle rush 2 win" can be displayed. If is not decided, "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)" is not performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a special internal winning combination (“C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”) is determined as the internal winning combination, ART lottery processing in BB or BR lottery processing in BB is performed. However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, even when an internal winning combination other than the special internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery processing, the ART lottery processing in BB or the BR lottery processing in BB may be performed.

For example, if an internal winning combination other than the special internal winning combination is determined and any of "ART winning", "Battle Rush 1 winning" and "Battle Rush 2 winning" is determined, then the special winning combination is determined. When the internal winning combination ("C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P") is determined as the internal winning combination, "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)" is performed. That is, after that, when a special internal winning combination (“C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”) is determined as the internal winning combination, “reverse push” is performed regardless of the result of the ART lottery process in BB or the BR lottery process in BB. Navi (navigation aiming at white BAR) ".

On the other hand, in S567, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the winning (when the determination in S567 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the Gase reverse push lottery based on the Gase reverse push lottery table (not shown) (S569). ). In the present embodiment, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "6" or "9", the reverse push lottery is performed. Then, when the "Gase reverse push winning" is decided, the "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)" is performed.

When the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "6" or "9", the ART lottery processing in BB and the BR lottery processing in BB are not performed. Therefore, when the small role / replay data pointer is "6" or "9", none of "ART win", "Battle rush 1 win", and "Battle rush 2 win" is determined.

When the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "6" or "9", "C_HOM_B" to "C_HOM_J" and "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P" are determined in duplicate as internal winning combinations. (See FIGS. 25 and 26). Then, when the small combination / replay data pointer is "6" or "9", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P", provided that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". The combination of symbols corresponding to is stopped and displayed.

Therefore, when the data pointer for small role / replay is "6" or "9", the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" according to "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)". Even so, the combination of the "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR" symbols is not stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can recognize that none of the "ART win", the "battle rush 1 win" and the "battle rush 2 win" has been determined.

When "C_HOM_B", "C_HOM_E" to "C_HOM_G" are determined as internal winning combinations, if the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing, "white BAR"-"white" until the second stop. The combination of the "BAR"-"white BAR" symbols is a stop mode (so-called "tempai") that can be stopped and displayed along a straight line. Then, at the third stop, the combination of the symbols "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR" is not stopped and displayed.

After the processing of S568 or S569, or when the determination in S564 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the RB flag is ON (S570).

In S570, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RB flag is ON (when the determination in S570 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART lottery process in the RB based on the ART lottery table in the RB (not shown). Alternatively, the BR lottery process in RB is performed based on the BR lottery table in RB (not shown) (S571). The ART lottery process in RB and the BR lottery process in RB show a second specific example of the benefit determining means according to the game machine of the present invention. Further, the ART lottery process in RB also serves as a second specific example of the assisted state lottery means according to the present invention.

Specifically, when it is a non-ART RB and the small role / replay data pointer (winning number) is any of "7", "8", "10", and "11", the RB Medium ART set number lottery processing is performed. On the other hand, if it is an RB in ART and the data pointer (winning number) for small win / replay is any one of "7", "8", "10", and "11", the BR lottery process in RB is performed. I do.

After the processing of S571 or when the determination in S570 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB medium-high probability counter is 1 or more (S572). In S572, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB medium / high probability counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S572 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the BB medium / high probability counter by "1" (S573). ..

On the other hand, in S572, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB medium-high probability counter is not 1 or more (when the determination in S572 is NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the pseudo-bonus game number counter by "1" ( S574).

After the processing of S573 or S574, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the game number counter during the pseudo-bonus is 1 or more (S575). In S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the pseudo-bonus game number counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S575 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo-bonus processing and receives a start command. Move to S546 of time processing (see FIG. 103).

On the other hand, in S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the game number counter during the pseudo bonus is not 1 or more (when the determination in S575 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo bonus end processing (S576).

In the pseudo-bonus end-time process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the flag corresponding to the type of the pseudo-bonus that has ended. Further, when the ART flag is on and the value of the ART game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 performs the ART start processing. When the type of the completed pseudo-bonus is SBB, the sub CPU 102 turns on the ART flag and performs the ART start processing. When "1" or "2" is stored in the BR stock storage area, the sub CPU 102 performs the BR start processing. This BR start processing shows a specific example of the special set game starting means according to the present invention. Then, after the processing of S576, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the pseudo-bonus, and shifts the processing to S546 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103).

[Processing during ART]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, the ART processing performed in S544 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is off (S581). The BR flag is either the BR flag 1 or the BR flag 2.

In S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is not off (when the determination in S581 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is based on the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 53). Bonus lottery processing is performed (S582). The bonus lottery process shows a specific example of the assist state determining means according to the game machine of the present invention.

When the "bonus win" is determined by the bonus lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus distribution lottery process based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown) to determine the type of the pseudo bonus. Then, the sub CPU 102 has a flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) corresponding to the determined pseudo-bonus and a preparing flag (“SBB preparing flag”, “BB preparing flag” or Turn on the "RB preparing flag").

After the process of S582, the sub CPU 102 performs the additional lottery process based on the additional lottery table (not shown) (S583). When the number of additional games is determined by this additional lottery process, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined number of additional games to the ART game number counter. In S583, the sub CPU 102 may perform the BR lottery process separately from the additional lottery process.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "preparing flag (ART preparing flag)" is on (S584). In S584, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparing flag is ON (when the determination in S584 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART and starts the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103). Move to S546.

In S584, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparing flag is not ON (when the determination in S584 is NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the ART game number counter by "1" (S585). After the processing of S585, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

Here, returning to S581 again, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S581 that the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is off (when the determination in S581 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is an additional game. It is determined whether or not the value of the number counter is 1 or more (S586).

In S586, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" or more (when the determination in S586 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the additional game number counter by "1". (S587). Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional game number counter is "1" and the additional additional A flag is ON (S588).

In S588, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" and the additional additional A flag is ON (when the determination in S588 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds the additional additional A. The G number lottery process is performed (S589). In the additional additional A additional G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional additional A additional G number lottery table (see FIG. 61), and adds the determined additional game number to the ART game number counter. .. After the processing of S589, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

In S588, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" and the additional additional A flag is not on (when the determination in S588 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional additional games. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is "0" (S590).

In S590, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S590 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART and starts the processing when the start command is received. The process moves to S546 of the process (see FIG. 103).

On the other hand, in S590, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "0" (when the determination in S590 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the additional C flag ("additional C1 flag"). , "Additional addition C2 flag" or "Additional addition C3 flag") is determined whether or not it is on (S591). In S591, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional C flag is not on (when the determination in S591 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S595 described later.

On the other hand, in S591, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition C flag is ON (when the determination in S591 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the additional addition C addition G number lottery process (S592). The additional addition C addition G number lottery process of S592 shows a specific example of the automatic addition addition lottery according to the game machine of the present invention. That is, the additional C additional G number lottery process of S592 is performed on the start lever 16 before the additional C additional G number lottery process based on the operation on the MAX bet button 14 (1 bet button 15) is completed. Will be executed if

In the additional C additional G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional additional C additional G number lottery table (see FIG. 63), and adds the determined additional game number to the additional game number counter. ..

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is "continuation" (S593). If "1" or more is determined as the number of additional games by the additional C additional G number lottery process of S592, it becomes "continue", and "0" is set as the additional game number by the additional additional C additional G number lottery process. If it is decided, it will be "no continuation".

In S593, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is "continue" (when the determination in S593 is YES), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S592, and the number of additional games is calculated by the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing of S592. The processing of S592 and S593 is repeated until "0" is determined. Even if the number of times the additional C additional G number lottery process is performed reaches the specified number of times (for example, 1000 times), "no continuation" is determined and the additional C additional G number lottery process is completed. Good. Further, when the number of times the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing is performed reaches the specified number of times, even if the lottery result is "continuation", the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no continuation. The additional addition C addition G number lottery process may be completed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S593 that it is not "continuation" (when the determination in S593 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition C end time processing (S594). In the processing at the end of the additional addition C, the sub CPU 102 causes the corresponding additional addition flags (“additional addition A flag”, “additional addition B flag”, “additional addition C1 flag”, “additional addition C2 flag”, or “additional addition C3”. Flag ") is turned off. Further, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the additional game number counter to the value of the ART game number counter, and clears the value of the additional game number counter.

After the processing of S594 or when the determination in S591 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation processing (S595). The details of the BR continuous processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 107 described later. After the processing of S595, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

Here, returning to S586 again, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S586 that the value of the additional game number counter is not "1" or more (when the determination in S586 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the BR continuation flag. Determines whether or not is "1" or more (S596).

In S596, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is "1" or more (when the determination in S596 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition during BR and promotion lottery processing (S597).

In the additional addition and promotion lottery processing during BR, the sub CPU 102 determines the addition content based on the additional addition and promotion lottery table during BR (see FIG. 60), and the additional addition flag corresponding to the determined addition content (“additional addition”). Turn on the "A flag", "Additional addition B flag", "Additional addition C1 flag", "Additional addition C2 flag" or "Additional addition C3 flag").

As for the additional addition flag, only one of the various additional additions described above is turned on. Moreover, even if the additional addition may shift to the upper rank, it does not shift to the lower rank. For example, if the additional content determined this time is higher than the additional content determined last time, the additional addition flag corresponding to the additional content determined last time is turned off, and the additional addition flag corresponding to the additional content determined this time is turned on. .. On the other hand, if the additional content determined this time is lower than the additional content determined last time, the additional addition flag corresponding to the previously determined additional content is kept on.

On the other hand, in S596, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is not "1" or more (when the determination in S596 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation rewriting lottery process (S598).

In the BR continuation rewriting lottery process, the sub CPU 102 draws whether or not to rewrite the BR "discontinuity" to "continuation" based on the BR continuation rewriting lottery table (not shown). Then, when it is decided to rewrite the "discontinuation" of the BR to the "continuation", the BR continuation processing is performed (see FIG. 107 described later).

After the processing of S597 or S598, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the BR game number counter by "1" (S599). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BR game number counter is "1" or more (S600). In S600, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR game number counter is "1" or more (when the determination in S600 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART and performs the processing at the time of receiving the start command (process at the time of receiving the start command). Move to S546 (see FIG. 103).

On the other hand, in S600, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR game number counter is not "1" or more (when the determination in S600 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the BR continuation flag is "1" or more. Is determined (S601).

In S601, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is not "1" or more (when the determination in S601 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BR end processing (S602). In the BR end processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR flag (“BR1 flag 1” or “BR2 flag”). Further, when the turned-off flag is the "BR2 flag", or when the number of BR continuations is a predetermined number (for example, "20 or more"), the sub CPU 102 is preparing the "SBB flag" and "SBB". Turn on the "flag" and "BR1 flag". That is, the BR end processing shows a specific example of the benefit granting means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. After the processing of S602, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

On the other hand, in S601, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is "1" or more (when the determination in S601 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an additional lottery process when the BR continues (S603). In the BR continuation addition lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of addition games based on the BR continuation addition lottery table (not shown), and adds the determined number of addition games to the value of the ART game number counter. In the additional lottery process for continuing BR of the present embodiment, "0" is not determined as the number of additional games, but a specified number (for example, "10") or more is determined. Further, the additional lottery process for continuing BR shows a specific example of the additional game number lottery means according to the present invention.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional addition flag is on (S604). In S604, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition flag is ON (when the determination in S604 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "2" to the value of the additional addition game number counter (S605). After the processing of S605, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

On the other hand, in S604, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition flag is not ON (when the determination in S604 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation processing (S606). The details of the BR continuous processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 107 described later. After the processing of S606, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

[BR continuous processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the BR continuous processing performed in S595 or S606 in the flowchart of the processing during ART (see FIGS. 105 and 106) will be described. This BR continuation processing shows a specific example of the special set game continuation lottery means according to the present invention.

First, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR continuation flag (S621). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds "10" to the value of the BR game number counter (S622). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BR successive continuation flag is "1" (S623).

In S623, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BR continuation continuation flag is "1" (when the determination in S623 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BR continuation flag and sets the BR continuation continuation storage area to "1". 2 ”is set (stored) (S624). After that, the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S627 described later.

On the other hand, in S623, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BR continuation continuation flag is not "1" (when the determination in S623 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation lottery process (S625). In the BR continuous lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to continue BR based on the BR1 continuous lottery table (see FIG. 57) or the BR2 continuous lottery table (see FIG. 58).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is decided to continue BR by the process of S625 (S626). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S626 that it has not been determined to continue the BR (when the determination in S626 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation processing and the ART processing (FIGS. 105 and FIG. 106) also ends.

On the other hand, when the determination in S626 is YES, or after the processing in S624, the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation determination processing (S627). The details of the BR continuation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 described later. After the processing of S627, the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation processing, and also ends the ART processing (see FIGS. 105 and 106).

[Processing when BR continuation is decided]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the BR continuation determination processing performed in S627 in the flowchart of the BR continuation processing flowchart (see FIG. 107) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs an additional lottery process during BR (S641). This additional addition lottery process in BR shows a specific example of the additional addition effect determining means according to the game machine of the present invention. In the additional addition lottery process during BR, the sub CPU 102 determines the additional addition content based on the additional addition lottery table during BR (see FIG. 59). Then, the additional addition flag ("additional addition A flag", "additional addition B flag", "additional addition C1 flag", "additional addition C2 flag" or "additional addition C3 flag") corresponding to the determined additional addition content is set. Turn on.

Next, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BR continuation flag (S642). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a continuous lottery process one after another in BR (S643). In the BR successive consecutive lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to "continue" the BR successive consecutive lottery based on the BR consecutive consecutive lottery table (not shown). Then, when it is decided to "continue" the BR one after another, "1" is stored in the BR one after another continuation storage area. When the value of the BR successive continuous storage area is "2", the BR continuous continuous lottery process is not performed. After the processing of S643, the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation determination processing and also the BR continuation processing (see FIG. 107).

[Normal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the normal intermediate processing performed in S545 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is in CZ (S661). During CZ, the CZ flag is on and the CZ precursor flag is off. When the sub CPU 102 determines in S661 that it is not in the CZ (when the determination in S661 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a mode lottery process (S662).

In the present embodiment, in a general state, a plurality of modes in which the winning rate of CZ and the winning rate of pseudo-bonus are different are provided. In the mode lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the mode based on the mode lottery table (not shown), and shifts to the determined mode.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a CZ rush lottery process (S663). In the CZ rush lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ has been won based on the CZ rush lottery table (not shown). Then, when the winning of the CZ is determined, the sub CPU 102 turns on the CZ flag and the CZ precursor flag corresponding to the determined CZ. Further, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of precursor games based on the precursor game number lottery table (not shown), and stores the determined precursor games in the precursor game counter.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus lottery process based on the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 53) (S664). When the winning of the pseudo-bonus is determined by the bonus lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the type of the pseudo-bonus ("SBB", "BB" or "RB") based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown). To do. Then, the sub CPU 102 turns on the flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and the precursor flag (“BB precursor flag” or “RB precursor flag”) corresponding to the determined pseudo bonus. .. Further, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of precursor games based on the precursor game number lottery table (not shown), and stores the determined precursor games in the precursor game counter. After the processing of S664, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

Here, returning to S661 again, when it is determined in S661 that the sub CPU 102 is in the CZ (when the determination in S661 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the cut-in additional lottery process in the CZ (S665). This cut-in additional lottery process in CZ shows a specific example of the notification number additional lottery means related to the game machine of the present invention. In the CZ medium cut-in additional lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to add "1" to the specified number of times based on the CZ medium cut-in additional lottery table (see FIG. 51). Then, when it is decided to add "1" to the specified number of times, the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the CI number counter in CZ. As the cut-in additional lottery process in CZ according to the game machine of the present invention, it may be determined whether or not to add "2" or more to the specified number of times.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") has been won (S666). In S666, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") has been won (when the determination in S666 is YES), the sub CPU 102 "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the black BAR)". Is set (S667).

When the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") is won, the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", and the stop operation timing is a predetermined timing (aiming at the black BAR). On condition that, the combination of symbols related to "C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E" is stopped and displayed. That is, when the winning number "4" is won and the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", "black BAR"-"black BAR" corresponding to "C_BAR_A" depends on the timing of the stop operation. There is a possibility that the combination of "black BAR" symbols will be stopped and displayed on the effective line. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") is won, "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the black BAR)" is performed.

In the present embodiment, when the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") is won during CZ, the winning of the pseudo-bonus is determined. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed according to "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at black BAR)" and the combination of "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line. , The player can recognize that he has won the pseudo bonus.

After the processing of S667, the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus winning processing (S668). This bonus winning process shows a specific example of the advantageous state determining means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In the bonus winning process, the sub CPU 102 determines the type of pseudo-bonus (“SBB”, “BB” or “RB”) based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown). Then, the sub CPU 102 has a flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and a preparing flag (“SBB preparing flag”, “BB preparing flag” or “BB preparing flag”) corresponding to the determined pseudo bonus. Turn on the RB preparing flag ").

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs CZ end processing (S669). In the CZ end processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the CZ flag and clears the values of the CZ game number counter and the CI number counter during CZ. After the processing of S669, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

Here, returning to S666 again, when it is determined in S666 that the sub CPU 102 has not won the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") (when S666 is a NO determination), the sub CPU 102 is CZ. "1" is added to the number of games counter (S670).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a cut-in generation lottery process during CZ (S671). The cut-in generation lottery process in CZ shows a specific example of the notification generation lottery means according to the game machine of the present invention. In the CZ medium cut-in generation lottery process, whether or not the sub CPU 102 generates a cut-in (“reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the black BAR)”) based on the CZ medium cut-in generation lottery table (see FIG. 52). To decide.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a win to generate a cut-in (S672). In S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not a win to generate a cut-in (when the determination in S672 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal intermediate processing and performs the processing at the time of receiving the start command (when the process is received. Move to S546 (see FIG. 103).

On the other hand, in S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is a win to generate a cut-in (when the determination in S672 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the black BAR)". (S673).

In the present embodiment, when "loss" is determined by the internal lottery process, a lottery is performed in S671 to determine whether or not to generate a cut-in ("reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at black BAR)"). Therefore, in S671, even if it is decided to generate a cut-in and the stop operation is performed according to "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at black BAR)", "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" The combination of symbols of "" is not stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the stop table selected at the time of "loss" of the present embodiment displays the right when the stop order is "right, left, middle" and the stop operation timing is a predetermined timing (aiming at the black BAR). The number of sliding pieces at which the "black BAR" can be stopped is set in the window 4R and the middle display window 4C. As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the combination of the "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" symbols will be stopped and displayed until the second stop.

After the processing of S673, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the CI count counter in CZ by "1" (S674). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the CI count counter in CZ is "0" (S675). In S675, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the CI count counter during CZ is not "0" (when the determination in S675 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing and starts the processing when the start command is received. The process moves to S546 of the process (see FIG. 103).

On the other hand, in S675, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the CI count counter in CZ is "0" (when the determination in S675 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs causal value related processing (S676). The details of the causal value-related processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 110 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs CZ end processing (S677). Then, after the processing of S677, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

[Causal value related processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the causal value-related processing performed in S676 in the flowchart of the normal processing (see FIG. 109) and S723 in the flowchart of the preparing processing described later (see FIG. 111 described later) will be described. To do. The causal value-related processing of the present embodiment is executed at various timings corresponding to various conditions that refer to various causal value lottery tables.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a causal value accumulation lottery process (S701). In the causal value accumulation lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the causal value based on various causal value accumulation lottery tables (see FIGS. 64 to 72), and adds the determined causal value to the causal value counter.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" (S702). In S702, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter does not exceed "100" (when the determination in S702 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the causal value related processing and performs the processing during normal processing (normal processing). Move to S677 of (see FIG. 109) or S724 of the preparation process (see FIG. 111 to be described later) described later.

On the other hand, in S702, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" (when the determination in S702 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the causal value stock counter (S703). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the causal value counter by "100" (S704). Then, after the processing of S704, the sub CPU 102 ends the causal value-related processing, and shifts the processing to S677 of the normal intermediate processing (see FIG. 109) or S724 of the preparing processing described later (see FIG. 111 described later). ..

[Processing in preparation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the preparatory process to be performed in S546 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is being prepared (S721). In S721, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation is not in progress (when the determination in S721 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the preparation process and shifts the process to S547 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103). Move.

On the other hand, in S721, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation is in progress (when the determination in S721 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the preparation digestion G number counter (S722). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the causal value-related processing described with reference to FIG. 110 (S723).

After the processing of S723, the sub CPU 102 refers to the operating condition table (see FIG. 76) and determines whether or not the operating conditions are satisfied (S724). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S724 that the operating conditions are not satisfied (NO in S724), the sub CPU 102 ends the preparatory process and starts the process when the start command is received (see FIG. 103). Move to S547.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S724 that the sub CPU 102 satisfies the operating condition (when the determination in S724 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding preparing flag and sets the value of the preparing digestion G number counter. Clear (S725). Then, after the processing of S725, the sub CPU 102 ends the preparatory processing, and shifts the processing to S547 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

[Omen check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the precursor check process performed in S547 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is in the precursor (S741). When the sign is in progress, the value of the sign game counter is "1" or more. In S741, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the precursor is not in progress (when the determination in S741 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and shifts the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103). Move.

On the other hand, in S741, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the precursor is in progress (when the determination in S741 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the value of the precursor game counter (S742). However, when the preparing flag is on, the value of the precursor game counter is not subtracted by "1".

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter has become "0" (S743). In S743, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S743 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and receives a start command. Move to S548 of time processing (see FIG. 103).

On the other hand, in S743, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter has become "0" (when the determination in S743 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the start of CZ ( S744). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ precursor flag (“CZ1 precursor flag” or “CZ2 precursor flag”) to determine whether or not it is at the start of CZ.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S744 that it is at the start of CZ (when the determination in S744 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the CZ start process (S745). This CZ start processing shows a specific example of the specific game start means according to the game machine of the present invention.

In the CZ start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding precursor flag and sets the initial value according to the type of the CZ flag in the CI count counter during CZ. In the present embodiment, the initial value when the CZ1 flag is on is "4", and the initial value when the CZ2 flag is on is "10". After the process of S745, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process, and shifts the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

On the other hand, in S744, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not at the start of CZ (when the determination in S744 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the start of the pseudo bonus (S746). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the start of the bonus by referring to the precursor flag (“BB precursor flag” or “RB precursor flag”) related to the pseudo bonus.

In S746, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the start of the pseudo bonus (when the determination in S746 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus start process (S747). In the bonus start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding precursor flag, and at the time of bonus start according to the flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) related to the pseudo bonus that is turned on. Perform processing.

When the SBB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the SBB preparing flag, and when the BB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB preparing flag. When the RB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the RB preparing flag. After the process of S747, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process, and shifts the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

On the other hand, in S746, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not at the start of the bonus (when the determination in S746 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the start of ART (second ART) (S748). ). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the start of ART (second ART) with reference to the ART precursor flag.

In S748, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the start of ART (second ART) (when the determination in S748 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART start processing (S749). In the ART start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding precursor flag and turns on the ART preparing flag. However, when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the ART preparing flag is not turned on. Further, in the ART start processing, the sub CPU 102 sets "50" in the ART game number counter. After the process of S749, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process, and shifts the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

On the other hand, in S748, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the start of ART (second ART) (when the determination in S748 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the start of BR (S750). ). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the start of BR by referring to the BR precursor flag.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S750 that it is not at the start of BR (when the determination in S750 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and performs the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103) S548. Move to.

On the other hand, in S750, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the start of BR (when the determination in S750 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR precursor flag (S751). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation processing described with reference to FIG. 107 (S752). After the processing of S752, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check processing, and shifts the processing to S548 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

[Direction lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the effect lottery process performed in S548 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect number lottery process (S761). In the effect number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the effect number lottery table (not shown) and determines the effect number based on various parameters stored in the sub storage area. Then, the determined effect number is stored in the sub storage area.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is a development effect (failure) (S762). In S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is not a development effect (failure) (when the determination in S762 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery process and starts a command. The reception processing (see FIG. 103) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is a development effect (failure) (when the determination in S762 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a provisional causal value lottery process (when the determination in S762 is YES). S763). This provisional causal value lottery process shows a specific example of the provisional causal value determining means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In the provisional causal value lottery process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the provisional causal value lottery table (see FIG. 73) and determines the provisional causal value based on the type of development effect. Then, the determined provisional causal value is stored in the sub storage area.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a causal value determination process (S764). This causal value determination process shows a specific example of the causal value determination means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In the causal value determination process, the sub CPU 102 corrects the determined provisional causal value to the maximum value within the range of the internal point, and determines it as the causal value. Then, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined causal value to the value of the causal value counter. Further, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the same value as the determined causal value from the value of the internal point counter.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" (S765). In S765, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter does not exceed "100" (when the determination in S765 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery process and processes when the start command is received. (See FIG. 103) also ends.

On the other hand, in S765, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" (when the determination in S765 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the value of the causal value stock (1). S766).

Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the causal value counter by "100" (S767). After the process of S767, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery process and also ends the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103).

[Processing when receiving reel stop command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the reel stop command reception processing performed in S525 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 102) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional game number counter is "1" (S781). In S781, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is not "1" (when the determination in S781 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command and directs the processing. The process moves to S526 of the content determination process (see FIG. 102).

On the other hand, in S781, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" (when the determination in S781 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional additional B flag is on. Is determined (S782). In S782, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition B flag is not on (when the determination in S782 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and performs the processing to determine the effect content (FIG. FIG. (Refer to 102), move to S526.

On the other hand, in S782, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition B flag is ON (when the determination in S782 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the additional addition B addition G number lottery process (S783). In the additional B additional G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional B additional G number lottery table (see FIG. 62), and adds the determined additional game number to the additional game number counter. To do.

In the additional B additional G number lottery process, the number of additional games determined in the previous stop operation is referred to. The number of additional games determined in the previous stop operation is acquired by referring to the number of additional games counter.

After the process of S783, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the third stop operation (S784). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S784 that the operation is not the third stop operation (when the determination in S784 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception processing and performs the processing to determine the effect content (see FIG. 102). ) S526.

On the other hand, in S784, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation is the third stop operation (when the determination in S784 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the additional addition B end time processing (S785). In the processing at the end of the additional addition B, the sub CPU 102 turns off the additional addition B flag. Further, the value of the additional game number counter is added to the ART game number counter, and the value of the additional game number counter is cleared. After the processing of S785, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and shifts the processing to S526 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 102).

[Processing when no operation command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the non-operation command reception processing performed in S536 in the flowchart (see FIG. 102) of the effect content determination processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional game number counter is "1" (S801). In S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is not "1" (when the determination in S801 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the non-operation command reception processing and the effect content. The determination process (see FIG. 102) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" (when the determination in S801 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional additional C flag is on. (S802). In S802, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional C flag is not on (when the determination in S802 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the non-operation command reception process and determines the effect content (FIG. 102). See) also ends.

On the other hand, in S802, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional additional C flag is ON (when the determination in S802 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the input number is the number that can start the game (S803). ). The fact that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game means that the start operation can be accepted.

In S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S803 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the non-operation command reception process and determines the effect content (FIG. 102) also ends.

On the other hand, in S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S803 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BET switch 62 is on (S804). ). The BET switch 62 performs on-edge detection when the MAX bet button 14 (1 bet button 15) is pressed.

In S804, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BET switch 62 is not on (when the determination in S804 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the non-operation command reception process and determines the effect content (see FIG. 102). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, in S804, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BET switch 62 is ON (when the determination in S804 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an additional addition C addition G number lottery process (S805). The additional addition C addition G number lottery process of S805 shows a specific example of the additional addition lottery according to the game machine of the present invention.

In the additional C additional G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional C additional G number lottery table. Then, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined number of additional games to the value of the number of additional games counter. When the number of additional games of "1" or more is determined in the lottery process for the number of additional G added C, the "continuation" of the additional additional C is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not "continuation" is determined in the additional addition C addition G number lottery process (S806). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S806 that "continuation" has been determined (when the determination in S806 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the non-operation command reception process and determines the effect content (see FIG. 102). Also ends.

On the other hand, in S806, when the sub CPU 102 determines that "continuation" has not been determined (when the determination in S806 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition C end time processing (S807). In the processing at the end of the additional addition C, the sub CPU 102 turns off the additional addition C flag (“additional addition C1 flag”, “additional addition C2 flag”, or “additional addition C3 flag”). Further, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the additional game number counter to the value of the ART game number counter. Then, the sub CPU 102 clears the value of the additional game number counter. Then, after the processing of S807, the sub CPU 102 ends the non-operation command reception processing, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 102).

[Various effects using the touch input section]
Next, various effects performed by using the touch input unit 31a will be described with reference to the drawings.

(1) Notification effect of the number of additional games First, the notification effect of the number of additional games of ART (the number of additions of the number of games in the assisted state) using the touch input unit 31a will be described with reference to FIGS. 116A to 116C. FIGS. 116A to 116C are diagrams showing a state of notification effect of the number of additional games using the touch input unit 31a.

In the present embodiment, when the number of additional games of ART is determined in the lottery process for adding the number of G in BB (S565 in FIG. 104), the number of additional games determined by the effect using the touch input unit 31a is notified. Hereinafter, of the display unit (display screen) 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11, the area located above the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is referred to as the main screen 111, and the area provided with the touch panel input unit 31a is referred to as the sub screen 112. To call.

When the number of additional games is determined in the lottery process for adding the number of Gs in the BB, the characters "scratch" are displayed on the sub screen 112 as shown in FIG. 116A. In addition, a circular "fill" is displayed below the word "scratch" on the sub screen 112. The color of this "fill" can be set as appropriate, but can be set to, for example, silver. This makes the "fill" look like a silver scratch print used for lottery and the like.

Next, when the player rubs the "filled" area with a finger, as shown in FIG. 116B, the part rubbed with the "filled" finger disappears on the sub screen 112, and characters and numbers are removed from the disappeared part. , Figures, patterns, etc. are displayed so that a part of the image can be seen. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect as if the silver scratch used for a lottery or the like is being scraped, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect.

Then, when the portion where the "fill" disappears becomes large, as shown in FIG. 116C, the entire number indicating the number of additional games becomes visible. As a result, the player can recognize the determined number of additional games (for example, "+50"). In the present embodiment, when a predetermined time elapses after the circular "fill" is displayed on the sub screen 112, a number indicating the number of additional games is displayed on the main screen 111.

In order to execute such an effect, when the number of additional games is determined, the sub-control circuit 101 first causes the sub-screen 112 to display the above-mentioned "fill". Next, when the touch input information was output from the part of the touch sensor module 31 that overlaps with the area where the "fill" was displayed, the sub-control circuit 101 was rubbed with the "fill" finger based on the touch input information. Erase the part. Then, the sub-control circuit 101 executes a display on the sub-screen 112 so that an image showing the number of additional games can be seen from the erased portion.

In the game machine of the present invention, when a predetermined time elapses after the circular "fill" is displayed on the sub screen 112, all the "fill" is erased and a number indicating the number of games is added to the sub screen 112. The whole may be displayed.

As described above, the present embodiment is provided with a notification effect in which the number of games is displayed on the sub screen 112 when the "fill" disappears. However, as a notification effect using the touch panel input unit 31a provided in the game machine of the present invention, when the "fill" displayed on the sub screen 112 disappears, various information to be notified to the player is displayed. May be good. Various types of information to be notified to the player include, for example, the above-mentioned information notifying that "the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player has been determined" and the type of small winning combination determined as the internal winning combination (for example,). , "Bell" and "Replay").

The above-mentioned notification effect of the number of additional games using the touch panel input unit 31a is performed from after the additional lottery process (after the start lever is operated) to when the sub CPU 102 receives the display command (until the third stop of the reel). It can be done at any time. Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the number of additional games determined by the G number addition lottery process in BB (S565 in FIG. 104) is notified by the effect of erasing the above-mentioned "filling", but the present invention relates to this. Not limited. For example, even when the number of ART games is determined to be added by various additional lottery processes during the ART processing (see FIG. 105), the number of additional games is increased by the effect of erasing the "filling" in the same manner as in the present embodiment. You may perform the effect of notifying.

(2) Selection and production of the number of additional games In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, as an production using the touch panel input unit 31a, not only the above-mentioned notification effect of the number of additional games of ART (the number of times the game is added in the assisted state) is also produced. It also has an effect function that allows the number of additional games of ART to be selected by a predetermined operation on the touch panel input unit 31a (sub screen 112) of the player. The operation of the selection effect of the number of additional games of ART using the touch panel input unit 31a is also controlled by the sub CPU 201, similarly to the notification effect of the number of additional games of ART described above.

First, an outline of the selection effect of the number of additional games of ART in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, when the selection effect of the number of additional games of ART is started, a question of a predetermined size (initial size) is displayed on the sub screen 112 of the touch panel input unit 31a. In the present embodiment, the initial size of the question is set so that the player cannot clearly discriminate (visually recognize) the content of the question.

Next, the player touches the question displayed on the sub screen 112 (touch panel input unit 31a) to perform a predetermined zoom operation, and enlarges and displays the question. Then, the player confirms the contents of the enlarged question and answers. At this time, the zoom magnification (enlarged display magnification) of the question can be arbitrarily determined by the player. The answer to the question is executed by, for example, a predetermined operation such as a player's touch operation on the predetermined answer option displayed on the sub screen 112.

Then, if the answer is correct, the player is given an additional number of games corresponding to the zoom magnification from the initial size of the question at the time of answering. In this embodiment, the correspondence between the zoom magnification of the question (including 0% zoom magnification) and the number of additional games is such that the smaller the zoom magnification from the initial size of the question at the time of answering, the larger the number of additional games. It is preset.

In the present embodiment, the player's operation during the selection and production of the number of additional games enables only the zoom operation for the question and the touch operation for the answer option, and other operations such as the slide operation and the wide operation. Etc. are invalid. Therefore, in the selection effect of the number of additional games of the present embodiment, for example, the display size of the question cannot be returned to the display size before the enlarged display (the zoom magnification is returned to the zoom magnification before the zoom operation) by the wide operation.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 117A and 117B, and FIGS. 118A to 118C, an example of the selection effect of the number of additional games of ART performed in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. It should be noted that FIGS. 117A and 117B, and FIGS. 118A to 118C are diagrams showing a schematic configuration near the touch panel input unit 31a and a state of selection effect of the number of additional games of ART in the present embodiment.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 117A and 117B and FIGS. 118A to 118C, an example in which a visual acuity test is adopted as a question to be asked in the selection effect of the number of additional games will be described. Therefore, in this example, a question for the player to answer the opening direction of the ring used in the visual acuity test is displayed on the sub screen 112 of the touch panel input unit 31a.

When the selection effect of the number of additional games of ART is started, first, as shown in FIG. 117A, the question display screen 201 (initial answer screen) is displayed on the sub screen 112, and the question display screen 201 (predetermined area). A ring of a predetermined initial size is displayed as question 202 in the substantially center of. At this time, the question 202 is displayed in an initial size so that the player cannot clearly determine (visually recognize) the opening direction (question content) of the ring.

At this time, in the vicinity of the outer edge of the question display screen 201, the touch areas 203 of a plurality of types of answer options (“top”, “bottom”, “left”, “left”, “left” in FIG. 117A, along the outer peripheral direction thereof. Areas described as "right", "upper left", "lower left", "upper right" and "lower right") are displayed. The touch area 203 of each answer option is arranged at a position on the question display screen 201 where it is difficult for the player's finger to touch when performing the zoom operation of the player to the question 202 described later. Further, the touch area 203 of each answer option is arranged at a position substantially corresponding to the opening direction of the ring on the question display screen 201. For example, the touch area 203 of the answer option "upper" is arranged in the center near the upper side of the question display screen 201, and the touch area 203 of the answer option "upper left" is arranged near the upper left corner of the question display screen 201. .. The arrangement form of the plurality of types of answer options is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 117A, and can be arbitrarily set.

Further, on the question display screen 201, a wording (in FIG. 117A) prompting the player to perform a zoom operation (enlarged display operation) of the question 202 (ring) or an answer operation (touch operation to the answer option) of the question 202. "Zoom or Answer!") Is also displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 117A, this wording is displayed at the lower part of the question 202, but is displayed at an arbitrary position as long as it is in the question display screen 201 and does not overlap with the question 202 and the answer options. be able to.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117B, the player touches the vicinity of the question 202 in the question display screen 201 and performs a pinch-out operation (white arrow in FIG. 117B) with a predetermined spreading amount. As a result, the player's pinch-out operation (zoom operation) is detected by the touch sensor module 31, and the touch input information (zoom operation information) corresponding to the zoom operation is output from the touch sensor module 31 to the sub CPU 201.

In the present embodiment, the number of times the player can execute the zoom operation is not limited to one, and the zoom operation is performed during the period from the start of the selection effect of the number of additional games to the selection of the answer by the player. Can be repeated multiple times. However, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the zoom operation can be executed is not set, but the display size of question 202 (ring) is set to an upper limit, and the maximum ring that the entire ring fits in the question display screen 201. Let the display size of question 202 be the upper limit display size of question 202. Further, in the present embodiment, an upper limit of the number of times the zoom operation can be executed may be set.

Next, based on the zoom operation information input from the touch sensor module 31, the sub CPU 102 arranges the visual acuity test ring, which is the question 202, at the substantially center of the question display screen 201, as shown in FIG. 118A. Enlarge and display at the zoom magnification corresponding to the zoom operation information. By this enlarged display, in the example shown in FIG. 118A, the player can recognize that the question 202 is a ring whose opening direction is downward.

Next, when the player looks at the enlarged question 202 (ring) and touches the touch area 203 of the predetermined answer option with his / her finger from the touch area 203 of the plurality of types of answer options as shown in FIG. 118B. (When the answer operation is performed), the touch input information (answer information) corresponding to the answer operation is output from the touch sensor module 31 to the sub CPU 201.

In the present embodiment, the timing of the player's answer operation, that is, the zoom magnification from the initial size of the question 202 at the time of answering, can be arbitrarily selected by the player. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 118A, the player may answer when the ring is enlarged and displayed to a size in which the opening direction of the ring (correct answer of question 202) can be clearly seen, or question 202. The display size may be such that the player cannot clearly determine the opening direction.

In the latter case, for example, the player may give an answer on the initial answer screen shown in FIG. 117A. In this case, the selection effect of the number of additional games is completed without performing the zoom operation, but when the answer to question 202 is correct, the number of additional games corresponding to the zoom magnification of 0% is acquired. That is, in this case, it is possible to acquire the largest number of additional games among the plurality of types of additional games that can be acquired in the selection effect of the number of additional games being executed.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines the correct / incorrect answer of the answer based on the answer information input from the touch sensor module 31. Then, if the answer is correct, refer to the zoom magnification of the current question 202 (at the time of answering), and as shown in FIG. 118C, from the initial size of the question 202 in the substantially center of the question display screen 201. Displays the number of additional games corresponding to the zoom magnification of.

For example, as shown in the examples shown in FIGS. 118B and 118C, when the player touches and selects the touch area 203 of the answer option "bottom" from among a plurality of types of answer options, the answer is correct, so the question is displayed. A "+30" game is displayed as the number of additional games corresponding to the zoom magnification of question 202 at the time of answering in the substantially center of the screen 201. Further, at this time, after the number of additional games is acquired (selected), the sub CPU 102 displays the acquired number of additional games (“+30”) on the main screen 111.

On the other hand, if the answer is incorrect, information (wording, etc.) indicating that the answer is incorrect is displayed in the question display screen 201 (not shown). At this time, the number of additional games may be set to "0", or a preset minimum guaranteed number of additional games (for example, "5" games, etc.) may be given to the player. In the latter case, the sub CPU 102 displays the number of acquired minimum guaranteed additional games on the main screen 111.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the selection effect of the number of additional games of ART is performed. It should be noted that the lottery process (not shown) for determining whether or not to perform the selection effect of the number of additional games of ART is performed when the start lever is operated (at the time of the start operation), and the content of the effect is also determined in this decision lottery process. To. Further, the above-mentioned selection effect of the number of additional games is performed at an arbitrary timing from after the selection effect determination lottery process (after the start lever operation) to the reception of the display command by the sub CPU 102 (until the third stop of the reel). Can be done with.

Then, when the sub CPU 102 receives the display command (reel), the process of adding the number of additional games selected (acquired) in the selection effect of the additional game to the number of currently remaining ART games (addition confirmation) is executed. It is performed at the time of the third stop). Therefore, the data of the number of additional games selected (acquired) by the selection effect of the additional game described above is held (stored) in the sub RAM 103 until the display command is received.

In the present embodiment, only one of the above-mentioned selection effect of the ART additional game and the notification effect of the number of ART additional games described with reference to FIGS. 116A to 116C may be won, or both can be won. The configuration may be different. Further, the effect of selecting the number of additional games in the present embodiment can be applied not only to the case of determining the number of additional games during BB but also to the case of determining the number of additional games during ART.

Further, in the selection effect of the number of additional games of the present embodiment, from the time when the question 202 is displayed on the initial answer screen (FIG. 117A) or the answer screen (FIGS. 118A and 118B) in the middle of the selection effect until a predetermined time elapses. In addition, if the player does not perform the zoom operation or the answer operation (touch operation) on the question 202, the selection effect of the number of additional games may be automatically terminated. In this configuration, if the player does not perform the zoom operation or the answer operation for the answer screen for a predetermined time, the number of additional games may be set to "0" as in the case of incorrect answer, or may be set in advance. The minimum guaranteed number of additional games (for example, "5" games, etc.) may be given to the player. The present invention is not limited to this, and is configured to wait for the progress of the game until the player performs a zoom operation or an answer operation to the question 202 on the answer screen during the selection and production of the number of additional games. May be good.

Further, in the selection effect of the number of additional games of the present embodiment, only one type of correspondence between the zoom magnification (including 0% of the zoom magnification) of question 202 and the number of additional games to be given is provided. Alternatively, a plurality of types may be provided. In the latter case, for example, a lottery determines the correspondence between the zoom magnification of question 202 and the number of additional games. The process of determining the correspondence between the zoom magnification and the number of additional games in question 202 is performed in the process of determining the selection effect of the number of additional games (not shown) performed when the start lever is operated (during the start operation).

As described above, in the selection effect of the number of additional games of ART in the present embodiment, the player gradually enlarges and discriminates the content of question 202 by the zoom operation, and at any timing with respect to question 202. You can answer (select the number of additional games). Therefore, in the selection effect of the number of additional games of the present embodiment, the player is strategically selected for the selection operation of the number of additional games (zoom operation and answer operation for question 202), and the player is consciously selected. Can be made. As a result, in the present embodiment, the playability of the selection effect of the number of additional games can be further enhanced.

The sub-control circuit 101 controls various processes for selecting the number of additional games of ART and addition processing for the number of selected additional games. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 is a means for displaying the question 202 on the sub-screen 112 (question display screen 201) of the touch panel input unit 31a and for enlarging and displaying the question 202 according to the zoom operation of the player. (Question display means), means for determining whether or not the answer to question 202 is correct (answer determination means), and if the answer is correct, add ART corresponding to the zoom magnification of question 202 at the time of answering. It also serves as a means for adding the number of games to the number of remaining games in ART at the time of answering (means for adding the number of games played).

Next, various modifications of the selection effect of the number of additional games of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the above-described effect of selecting the number of additional games of the present embodiment, the initial size of the question 202 displayed on the initial answer screen (question display screen 201 of FIG. 117A) cannot be determined (visually recognized) by the player. Although the example of setting the size has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial size of the question 202 displayed on the initial answer screen may be changed according to the game state, the internal winning combination, and the like. For example, the initial size of question 202 may be set to a size that allows the player to discriminate (visually recognize) the content of the question to some extent according to the game state, the internal winning combination, and the like. That is, a configuration may be provided in which the number of additional games corresponding to the zoom magnification of 0% can be easily acquired according to the game state, the internal winning combination, and the like.

Further, in the selection effect of the number of additional games of the present embodiment, the initial size of the question 202 displayed on the initial answer screen (question display screen 201 of FIG. 117A) is made constant, and the number of additional games corresponding to the initial size is set, for example. , It may be changed according to the game state, the internal winning combination, and the like.

Further, in the selection effect of the number of additional games of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of types of answer options for the question 202 are displayed on the sub screen 112 (question display screen 201) of the touch panel input unit 31a, and the player determines when answering. Although the configuration example in which the answer option is touched to select the answer has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be configured in which a plurality of types of answer options for question 202 are displayed on the main screen 111. In this case, the player operates various operation buttons provided on the front door 2b to select a predetermined answer option from a plurality of types of answer options displayed on the main screen 111.

Further, in the above-described effect of selecting the number of additional games of the present embodiment, as question 202, an example in which a question for identifying the opening direction of the ring for visual acuity test is adopted, that is, in the effect of selecting the number of additional games, the player Has described an example of playing a visual acuity test game, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

For example, as question 202, a question for identifying characters, numbers, figures, and the like may be adopted. That is, in the effect of selecting the number of additional games, the player may select (determine) the number of additional games of ART by playing, for example, a character guessing game. Also in this case, as in the above embodiment, the zoom magnification of question 202 (including 0% zoom magnification) so that the smaller the zoom magnification from the initial size of question 202 at the time of answering, the larger the number of additional games. And the correspondence relationship with the number of additional games are set in advance.

Further, in the selection effect of the number of additional games accompanied by the zoom operation of the player such as the visual acuity test game and the character guessing game described above, the pinch-out operation can be used as the zoom operation as described in the above embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Any zoom operation can be performed as long as the question 202 (circle, letters, numbers, figures, etc. for visual acuity test) can be enlarged and displayed when the player performs a predetermined operation while touching the sub screen 112. It can be used instead of the pinch-out operation. For example, a zoom operation that magnifies and displays question 202 based on the duration of the player's touch operation may be used instead of the pinch-out operation.

Further, in the selection effect of the number of additional games adopting the above-mentioned visual acuity test game, character guessing game, etc., the configuration may be configured so as not to require the player's zoom operation. For example, the question 202 may be automatically enlarged and displayed with the passage of time after the start of the selection effect of the number of additional games. In this case, the question 202 may be continuously enlarged and displayed with time after the start of the selection effect of the number of additional games, or the question 202 may be enlarged and displayed stepwise at predetermined time intervals. ..

As the answer form of the player in the selection effect of the number of additional games in which the question 202 is automatically enlarged and displayed, for example, the player performs a predetermined operation such as a touch operation on the sub screen 112 to perform the question 202. The enlarged display operation of question 202 may be stopped, and then the answer to the enlarged display question 202 may be adopted, or the player may respond to the question 202 without stopping the enlarged display operation of question 202. You may adopt the form of answering.

Further, in the effect of selecting the number of additional games of the present embodiment, the effect (game) mode in which the player answers by enlarging the question 202 by the zoom operation has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, on the initial answer screen (question display screen 201 of FIG. 117A), in order to make the question 202 difficult to see, all or part of the question 202 (for example, a ring) is covered with another image (filled image) and displayed. After that, the player may be able to grasp the content of question 202 while rubbing the area of the filled image with a finger (scratching operation) in the manner of scratching. That is, in the selection effect of the number of additional games, the player may play a scratch game and select (determine) the number of additional games of ART.

In this case, the number of additional games is determined according to the total amount of the filled images erased by the player's scratch operation by the time of answering, and the smaller the total amount of the filled images erased by the player's scratch operation, the more the additional games are added. In order to increase the number of games, the correspondence between the total amount of filled images erased by the scratch operation (including the case where the total amount is 0) and the number of additional games is set in advance.

Further, as the question 202, for example, a question is adopted in which two images having substantially the same contents are displayed on the question display screen 201 of FIG. 117A, and the player is made to search for a different part between the two images. May be good. That is, in the selection effect of the number of additional games, a spot the difference game may be played to determine the number of additional games of ART.

In the selection of the number of additional games that employs the spot-the-difference game, for example, if there is one different part between the two images, from the start of the effect until the player touches (correctly answers) the different part. The additional game may be determined according to the elapsed time of. In this case, the correspondence between the elapsed time until the correct answer and the number of additional games is set in advance so that the shorter the elapsed time until the correct answer, the larger the number of additional games.

In addition, in the selection effect of the number of additional games adopting the spot-the-difference game, for example, when a plurality of different parts are provided between two images, the wrong part that can be answered correctly within a predetermined time (time limit) from the start of the effect The additional game may be determined according to the number of. In this case, the correspondence between the number of correct answers and the number of additional games is set in advance so that the larger the number of incorrect points that can be answered correctly, the larger the number of additional games.

[Example of using the mobile terminal linkage function]
Next, an example of using the mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 133.

The mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachislot 1 is a function of linking the pachislot 1 and the mobile terminal. By using the mobile terminal cooperation function of pachislot 1, detailed information about the game played by the player can be recorded, and the function that does not affect the game result of pachislot 1 can be customized by satisfying predetermined conditions. Can be done.

Predetermined conditions include, for example, the determination of a specific small winning combination (internal winning combination) in succession, the execution of a specific effect, and the like. In addition, as a function to customize the function that does not affect the game result of pachislot 1, for example, the music output during the first ART (pseudo-bonus) or the second ART (ART) is made into a special song. For example, changing the costume of the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 may be mentioned.

When using the mobile terminal cooperation function, first, the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 by the operation of the player. Specifically, when the player presses the "ENTER" button (not shown) or the "SELECT" button while the unit game is completed, the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111. To. Further, as shown in FIG. 119, even when the player touches the uni-memo button displayed on the sub screen 112 when the unit game is completed, the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111.

The "state in which the unit game is completed" basically means that the player inserts the game medium (medal) after the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped and displayed by the player's stop operation. It is the period until it is done. If the game medium (medal) is paid out when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped and displayed, the period from the end of the payout to the operation of inserting the game medium by the player. Is "a state in which the unit game is completed". Further, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped and displayed, if the display role (replay) is related to the replay, the game medium is automatically inserted until the start lever 16 is tilted. The period is "a state in which the unit game is completed". Further, if there is a game stop period (such as a lock for production) after the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped and displayed, the player performs an operation of inserting the game medium after the game stop period ends. The period until the start lever 16 is tilted or the period until the start lever 16 is tilted is the "state in which the unit game is completed". Even if the player performs the operation of inserting the game medium, the period until the start lever 16 is tilted may be set as the "state in which the unit game is completed".

FIG. 120 shows a state in which the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111. The guide initial image includes the characters "Unimemo (registered trademark)" and "Please select your favorite menu". "Unimemo" is a specific example of a name representing a mobile terminal cooperation function.

As shown in FIG. 120, when the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, the guide menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items in the guide menu include "Start Unimemo", "Arrangement / Dividend", "Model Site", and "Return to Game".

When the player touches "Start Unimemo" in the guide menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 121 described later). When the player touches the "arrangement / payout", the arrangement / payout initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 132 described later). Then, when the player touches the "model site", the registration code for the model site is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 133 described later).

When the player touches "return to the game", the display of the guide initial image on the main screen 111 and the display of the guide menu on the sub screen 112 end. Then, on the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112, an image for effect to be displayed when playing a game and an initial image to be displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period are displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without touching any of the items in the guide menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 are designated with a video for directing to be displayed when playing a game and a pachislot machine 1. The initial image to be displayed when the operation is not performed for a period is displayed.

If the guide menu is displayed while the development effect (continuous effect) is being executed, the development effect (continuous effect) by the liquid crystal display device 11 is restarted after the display of the guide menu is finished. You may let me. Further, when the guide menu is displayed in the middle of the effect, the effect may be displayed from the beginning after the guide menu is displayed.

FIG. 121 shows a state in which the uni-memo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111. The uni-memo initial image includes the characters "uni-memo" and "customize your favorite character".

As shown in FIG. 121, when the Unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, the Unimemo menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items of the Unimemo menu include "password input", "record", "record and end", "member registration", "return to the game", and "return".

When the player touches "Enter password" in the Unimemo menu, a password display image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 122 described later).

When the player touches "Record" in the Unimemo menu while the password has been successfully entered, the recording registration code is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 126 described later). When the recording registration code is read by the mobile terminal, the URL of the website for recording the data related to the games played from the start of Unimemo to the present (recording the data without ending Unimemo) is acquired.

Hereinafter, the data related to the game played by the player will be referred to as "play data". In addition, as play data, for example, the number of games played, the number of payouts, the number of winning small wins, the names of the executed development effects, and the like can be mentioned.

When the player touches "Record and exit" in the Unimemo menu while the password has been successfully entered, a play data clear confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 128 described later).

In addition, when the player touches "Record" or "Record and end" in the Unimemo menu in a state where the password has not been entered (failed), the password input confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111. Is displayed (see FIG. 127 described later).

When the player touches "Membership registration" in the Unimemo menu, the membership registration registration code is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 131 described later). When the registration code for membership registration is read by the mobile terminal, the URL of the website for membership registration is obtained. In the present embodiment, when the member is registered, the password required to start Unimemo (mobile terminal cooperation function) can be obtained.

An expiration date (for example, one day) may be set in the "password". In addition, the password used once when performing Unimemo may be set to be invalid. In this case, it is necessary to obtain a password on the web every time a uni-memo is performed.

When you touch "Return to game" in the Unimemo menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display an image for production that is displayed when playing a game, and an initial display that is displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period. The image is displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without touching any of the items in the uni-memo menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display an effect image to be displayed when playing a game and a pachislot machine 1. The initial image to be displayed when the operation is not performed for a predetermined period is displayed. When "Back" is touched on the Unimemo menu, the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, and the guide menu is displayed on the sub screen 112 (see FIG. 120).

FIG. 122 shows a state in which the password display image is displayed on the main screen 111. The password display image includes a password input display area and the characters "Enter password".

As shown in FIG. 122, when the password display image is displayed on the main screen 111, the password input menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items of the password input menu include "OK", "Delete", "0" to "9", "A" to "F", "Return to game", and "Return".

When the player touches "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" in the password input menu of the password input menu, the touched numbers and characters are input and displayed in the password input display area. When the player touches "Enter" in the password input menu, a plurality of numbers and / or characters displayed in the password input display area are determined as the password to be input. Then, when the player touches "Delete" in the password input menu, the last entered number or character is deleted from the password input display area.

In the state where Unimemo has already started, the player can select "Enter", "Delete", "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" in the password input menu displayed on the sub screen 112. When any of the touches is made, a data clear confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 123 described later).

If the entered password is incorrect, a password entry failure notification image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 124 described later). On the other hand, if the entered password is correct, the password entry success notification image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 125 described later).

When the player touches "Return to game" in the password input menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display an image for production when the game is played, or when the pachislot machine 1 is not operated for a predetermined period of time. The initial image to be displayed is displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without the player touching any of the items in the password input menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display an image for production to be displayed when the game is played. , The initial image to be displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period is displayed. When the player touches "Back" in the password input menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, and the Unimemo menu is displayed on the sub screen 112 (see FIG. 121).

FIG. 123 shows a state in which the data clear confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111. The data clear confirmation image contains the characters "Play data will be cleared when the password is entered. Are you sure?" That is, when the password input is completed in the state where Unimemo has already been started, the play data up to that point is cleared. Then, the play data from the time when the password input is completed is accumulated in the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 123, when the data clear confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111, the data clear confirmation menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. Items in the data clear confirmation menu include "OK", "Return to game", and "Return".

When the player touches "OK" in the data clear confirmation menu, the password display image is displayed on the main screen 111, and the password input menu is displayed on the sub screen 112 (see FIG. 122). As a result, the player can resume inputting the password.

When the player touches "Return to game" in the data clear confirmation menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 are displayed when the video for production or the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period. The initial image to be displayed on is displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without the player touching any of the items in the data clear confirmation menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display an effect image to be displayed when the game is played. Or, the initial image to be displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period is displayed. When the player touches "Back" in the data clear confirmation menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, and the Unimemo menu is displayed on the sub screen 112 (see FIG. 121).

FIG. 124 shows a state in which the password input failure notification image is displayed on the main screen 111. The password input failure notification image notifies that the password input has failed.

As shown in FIG. 124, the password input failure notification image includes the characters "NG" and the characters "The password is different !? Please enter it again!". When the password input failure notification image is displayed on the main screen 111, the password input failure notification menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. Items in the password input failure menu include "password input", "return to game", and "return".

When the player touches "password input" in the password input failure menu, the password display image is displayed on the main screen 111, and the password input menu is displayed on the sub screen 112 (see FIG. 122). As a result, the player can re-enter the password.

When the player touches "Return to game" in the password input failure menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 are not operated for a predetermined period of time, such as the effect video to be displayed when playing the game or the pachislot machine 1. The initial image to be displayed is displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without touching any of the menu items when the player fails to enter the password, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 are displayed on the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 for the effect of displaying the game. An image or an initial image to be displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period is displayed. When the player touches "Back" in the password input failure menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, and the Unimemo menu is displayed on the sub screen 112 (see FIG. 121).

FIG. 125 shows a state in which the password input success notification image is displayed on the main screen 111. The password input success notification image notifies that the password input has been successful.

As shown in FIG. 125, the password input success notification image includes the characters "OK" and the characters "The password input has been confirmed!". If the password is successfully entered, the play data stored in the pachislot machine 1 is cleared. Then, the play data from the time when the password is successfully input is accumulated in the pachislot machine 1.

When the password input success notification image is displayed on the main screen 111, the password input success notification menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items in the menu when the password is successfully entered include "return to the game" and "return".

When the player touches "Return to game" in the menu when the password is successfully entered, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 do not operate the video for directing to be displayed when playing the game or the pachislot 1 for a predetermined period. The initial image to be displayed is displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without the player touching any of the items in the menu when the password is successfully input, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 are displayed on the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 for the effect of displaying the game. An image or an initial image to be displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period is displayed. When the player touches "Back" in the password input successful menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, and the Unimemo menu is displayed on the sub screen 112 (see FIG. 121).

FIG. 126 shows a state in which the recording registration code is displayed on the main screen 111. As shown in FIG. 126, the characters "Record play data!" Are displayed below the recording registration code on the main screen 111.

In addition, even if the play data is recorded in the middle of the website obtained by reading the recording registration code with the mobile terminal, the play data up to that point is not cleared. The play data recorded on the way is accumulated in the pachislot machine 1 until the uni-memo is finished or the password is input again.

When the recording registration code is displayed on the main screen 111, the recording menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items of the recording menu include "return to the game" and "return".

When the player touches "Return to game" in the recording menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display an image for production when the game is played, or when the pachislot machine 1 is not operated for a predetermined period. The initial image to be displayed is displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without the player touching any of the items in the menu at the time of recording, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display an image for production to be displayed when the game is played. , The initial image to be displayed when the pachi-slot machine 1 is not operated for a predetermined period is displayed. When the player touches "Back" in the recording menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, and the Unimemo menu is displayed on the sub screen 112 (see FIG. 121).

FIG. 127 shows a state in which the password input confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111. In the password input confirmation image, a notification that the password has not been successfully input and that the play data up to that point has not been accumulated is notified, and a notification that prompts the password input is performed.

As shown in FIG. 127, the password input confirmation image includes the characters "There is no play data !! Please enter the password to log in to Unimemo". In addition, at the bottom of the password input confirmation image, the characters "Press" Enter "to move to the password input screen" are displayed.

When the password input confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111, the password input confirmation menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items in the password input confirmation menu include "OK", "Return to game", and "Return".

When the player touches "OK" in the password input confirmation menu, the password display image is displayed on the main screen 111, and the password input menu is displayed on the sub screen 112 (see FIG. 122). As a result, the player can enter the password.

When the player touches "Return to game" in the password input confirmation menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 are displayed when the video for production or the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period. The initial image to be displayed on is displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without the player touching any of the items in the password input confirmation menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display an effect image to be displayed when the game is played. Or, the initial image to be displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period is displayed. When the player touches "Back" in the password input confirmation menu, the uni-memo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, and the uni-memo menu is displayed on the sub screen 112 (see FIG. 121).

FIG. 128 shows a state in which the play data clear confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111. In the play data clear confirmation image, when "record and end" is performed, it is notified that the play data is cleared.

As shown in FIG. 128, the play data clear confirmation image includes the characters "Is it okay to clear the play data when the registration code is displayed?" When the play data clear confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111, the play data clear confirmation menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items of the play data clear confirmation menu include "decision", "return to the game", and "return".

When the player touches "OK" in the play data clear confirmation menu, the registration code for recording and ending is displayed (see FIG. 129 described later).

When the player touches "Return to game" in the play data clear confirmation menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 do not operate the video for directing to be displayed when playing the game or the pachislot 1 for a predetermined period. The initial image to be displayed is displayed. That is, the recording and termination registration code is not displayed on the main screen 111. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without the player touching any of the items in the play data clear confirmation menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 are displayed on the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 for the effect of displaying the game. An image or an initial image to be displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period is displayed.

Further, when the player touches "Back" in the password input confirmation menu, the pachislot 1 displays the uni-memo initial image without displaying the recording and ending registration code on the main screen 111. Then, the uni-memo menu is displayed on the sub screen 112 (see FIG. 121).

FIG. 129 shows a state in which the recording and termination registration code is displayed on the main screen 111. As shown in FIG. 129, the characters "Thank you for playing !! Record the play data" are displayed below the recording and ending registration code on the main screen 111.

When the player reads the registration code for recording and ending with the mobile terminal, the URL of the website for recording the play data from the start of Unimemo to the present is acquired.

When the recording and ending registration code is displayed on the main screen 111, the recording and ending menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. Items in the record and exit menu include "return to game". When the player touches "Return to game" in the recording and ending menu, the ending confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 130 described later).

FIG. 130 shows a state in which the end confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111. The end confirmation image notifies that Unimemo will be terminated.

As shown in FIG. 130, the end confirmation image can no longer be accessed by selecting the registration code for recording and end and "End"! !! Are you sure you're okay? Includes the characters. When the end confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111, the end confirmation menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. Items in the end confirmation menu include "end".

When the player touches "End" in the end confirmation menu, the play data from the start of Unimemo to the present is cleared, and the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 are images for production to be displayed when playing the game. Or, the initial image to be displayed when the pachi-slot machine 1 is not operated for a predetermined period is displayed. Even if a predetermined time elapses without the player touching "End" in the end confirmation menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display an image for production to be displayed when the game is played. The initial image to be displayed when the pachi-slot machine 1 is not operated for a predetermined period is displayed. In this case, the play data from the start of Unimemo to the present is not cleared. When the end confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111, the play data from the start of Unimemo to the present may be cleared. Further, in this case, it is not necessary to display the end confirmation menu on the sub screen 112.

FIG. 131 shows a state in which the registration code for membership registration is displayed on the main screen 111. As shown in FIG. 131, the characters "If you are a first-time user, please access from this registration code to obtain a password" are displayed below the member registration registration code on the main screen 111.

When the member registration registration code is displayed on the main screen 111, the member registration menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items of the menu at the time of member registration include "password input", "return to the game", and "return".

When the player touches "password input" in the member registration menu, the password display image is displayed on the main screen 111, and the password input menu is displayed on the sub screen 112 (see FIG. 122). As a result, the player can enter the password.

When the player touches "Return to game" in the member registration menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 are displayed when the video for production or the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period. The initial image to be displayed on is displayed. In addition, even if a predetermined time elapses without the player touching any of the menu items at the time of member registration, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display an image for production when the game is performed. Or, the initial image to be displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period is displayed. When the player touches "Back" in the member registration menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, and the Unimemo menu is displayed on the sub screen 112 (see FIG. 121).

FIG. 132 shows a state in which the arrangement / dividend initial image is displayed on the main screen 111. The array / dividend initial image includes the characters "Please select" array "/" dividend "", an image related to the array, and an image related to the dividend.

As shown in FIG. 132, when the arrangement / payout initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, the arrangement / payout menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items in the array / payout menu include "to array", "to payout", "return to game", and "return".

When the player touches "To array" in the array / payout menu, an image showing all the arrays related to pachislot 1 is displayed on the main screen 111 (not shown). When the player touches the "payout", an image showing all the distributions related to the pachislot 1 is displayed on the main screen 111 (not shown).

When the player touches "Return to game" in the arrangement / payout menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 are displayed when the video for production or the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period. The initial image to be displayed on is displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without the player touching any of the items in the array / payout menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display an image for production when the game is played. Or, the initial image to be displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period is displayed. Further, even when the player performs a tilt operation on the bet buttons 14, 15 or the start lever 16 while the arrangement / payout initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 are displayed. Displays an image for production to be displayed when playing a game, and an initial image to be displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period.

When the player touches "Back" in the arrangement / payout menu, the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, and the guide menu is displayed on the sub screen 112 (see FIG. 120).

FIG. 133 shows a state in which the registration code for the model site is displayed on the main screen 111. As shown in FIG. 133, the characters "You can check more detailed model introductions on your mobile phone" are displayed below the registration code for the model site on the main screen 111. When displaying the model site registration code on the main screen 111, for example, a background image showing the character related to the pachislot machine 1 may be displayed.

When the player reads the registration code for the model site with the mobile terminal, the URL of the website introducing the information about the model of the pachislot machine 1 is acquired. Information on the pachislot 1 model includes, for example, the type and image of the production, the recommended striking method (for example, the push order, the design to be aimed at in the left display frame 4L, etc.), the introduction of the character, and the game flow (RT game state). Transition flow) and the like can be mentioned.

When the model site registration code is displayed on the main screen 111, the model site introduction menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items on the menu when introducing the model site include "start Unimemo", "dividend / arrangement", "model site", and "return".

The items on the menu when introducing the model site are the same as the items on the guide menu (see FIG. 120). Even if the player touches the "model site" in the menu when introducing the model site, the display of the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 does not change. That is, the model site registration code is displayed on the main screen 111, and the model site introduction menu is displayed on the sub screen 112.

[Action of pachislot 1]
In the present embodiment, "BR1" and "BR2" are provided as "BR". When "BR1" is continuous for a specified number (for example, "20") or more, the winning of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) and the start of "BR1" are determined. As a result, in "BR1", the result of the continuous lottery can include an expectation other than the determination of the number of additional games, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the game of the present invention, even if "BR1" is not continuous for "20" or more, a lottery is performed at the end of the "BR1" to win the first ART (pseudo-bonus) and "BR1". May be decided to start.

In addition, "BR2" determines the winning of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) regardless of the number of continuations. As a result, during "BR2", the expectation can be concentrated only on the result of the continuous lottery (determination of the number of additional games). As a result, what the player expects is different between "BR1" and "BR2", and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, "CZ1" and "CZ2" are provided as "CZ" in which the specified number of times for performing "navigation aiming at black BAR" (notification of display auxiliary information) is different from each other. As a result, it is possible to have an expectation as to which of "CZ1" and "CZ2" is determined, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game related to "CZ1" and "CZ2".

Further, in the present embodiment, "CZ1" basically ends when "navigation aiming at black BAR" is performed four times, and "CZ2" basically ends when "navigation aiming at black BAR" is performed 10 times. When done, it ends. Therefore, "CZ1" or "CZ2" will not end without "navigation aiming at black BAR" (notification of display auxiliary information) even once, and the interest of "CZ1" and "CZ2" will not be reduced. Can be done.

As the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the "CZ1" and "CZ2", a specific number of games (for example, "30") are played before the number of times the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" is executed reaches the specified number of times. Once digested, the winning of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) may be determined. As a result, even when there are many games in which "Navigation aiming at black BAR" is not performed in "CZ1" and "CZ2", the player has a sense of expectation that the winning of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) will be determined. Can be made. As a result, the interest of "CZ1" and "CZ2" can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to add "1" to the specified number of times for performing "navigation aiming at the black BAR" by the cut-in additional lottery process during CZ. As a result, the number of times the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" is performed during "CZ1" and "CZ2" may increase, so that the interest of the specific game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery process is different (predetermined internal winning combination), it is determined whether or not to execute the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" by the lottery process for generating the cut-in during CZ. To do. As a result, if a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") has not been determined as the internal winning combination and "Navigation aiming at the black BAR" is executed, the symbol related to the awarding of the medal The combination is not displayed as a stop, and the stop mode is off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the awarding of medals from being missed in the game in which the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the provisional causal value is determined according to the type of the effect (development effect), and the causal value is determined by correcting the provisional causal value within the range of the value of the internal point counter. Then, when the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" and "1" is added to the causal value stock counter, a privilege advantageous to the player is given (for example, the type of pseudo bonus is higher). Change to a pseudo bonus).

As a result, even if the notification by the production (development production) is not advantageous to the player, the causal value may be accumulated, and the expectation that the privilege that is advantageous to the player will be given later. Can have. As a result, even if the notification by the production (development production) is often not advantageous to the player, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

Further, in the present embodiment, when giving a privilege advantageous to the player, a causal value stock consumption lottery is performed to determine whether or not to subtract the value of the causal value stock by "1". As a result, there is a possibility that the player can obtain a privilege advantageous to the player without consuming the accumulated causal value (causal value stock). Then, when the causal value (causal value stock) is not consumed, another privilege advantageous to the player is given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a result of determining the internal winning combination determining means in the first ART (pseudo-bonus), a special internal winning combination (winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11" is supported. When the internal winning combination) is determined and the "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)" is performed, the winning of the second ART or the winning of the BR is determined. Further, in the first ART, the number of additional games of the first ART is determined according to the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means.

Then, in the game that consumes the determined number of additional games, the game that consumes the number of games (“30”, “60”, or “100”) of the first ART determined at the start of the first ART There is a high probability that "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)" will be performed when a special internal winning combination is decided. That is, the game that consumes the number of additional games in the first ART is in a high probability state in which the probability that the winning of the second ART or the winning of the BR is determined is high.

Therefore, as long as the first ART is executed (predetermined period), all the games performed in the high probability state can be digested no matter when the high probability state is reached. As a result, even if a high probability state is reached just before the end of the period in which the first ART is being executed, the expectation that the winning of the second ART or the winning of the BR will be determined can be prevented from decreasing. , The interest of the game in the first ART can be maintained until the end.

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is decided to give a benefit, and in the Gase reverse push navigation lottery process (see S569 in FIG. 104), "navigation aiming at black BAR" (notification of display auxiliary information) is determined. If so, "Navigation aiming at the black BAR" is executed. As a result, "Aim for Black BAR Navi" is executed not only when the special symbol combination corresponding to the special internal winning combination can be stopped and displayed, but also when the special symbol combination cannot be stopped and displayed. To.

Therefore, even if it is never decided to give the benefit in the first ART, there is a possibility that the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" is executed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the combination of special symbols may be stopped and displayed in the first ART and the benefit may be given, and the interest of the game in the first ART is improved. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is decided to continue "BR1" or "BR2" to the next set, whether or not to execute any of a plurality of additional additions by the additional addition lottery process during BR is determined. decide. Then, the additional additions C1, C2, and C3 of the plurality of additional addition effects perform the additional addition C addition G number lottery each time the operation on the MAX bet button 14 is detected, and continue until no continuation is won. As a result, if the game is not won without continuation, the number of additional games will increase each time the MAX bet button 14 is operated, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, if an operation on the start lever 16 is detected before the non-continuation is won in the additional additions C1, C2, and C3, the additional addition C addition G number is automatically detected even if the operation on the MAX bet button 14 is not detected. Lottery (automatic addition and addition lottery) is performed. As a result, when there is no time or the operation on the MAX bet button 14 is troublesome, it is possible to omit the lottery for the number of additional C and G based on the operation on the MAX bet button 14.

In addition, it is possible to obtain the same number of additional games as in the case of performing the additional additional C additional G number lottery based on the operation on the MAX bet button 14. Further, when the additional C additional G number lottery is automatically performed, the upper limit value (for example, "1000") is set for the number of lottery, so the automatic additional C additional G number lottery continues infinitely. It can be prevented from doing so.

2. Second Embodiment Next, a pachi-slot machine, which is a gaming machine showing the second embodiment of the present invention, will be described.

The pachislot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the same configuration as the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. The difference between the pachi-slot machine and the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment is the game start lock process performed in S10 of the main motion process of the pachi-slot machine 1. Therefore, here, with reference to FIG. 134, only the lock processing at the start of the game in the pachislot according to the second embodiment will be described, and the description of other operations and the configuration of the pachislot will be omitted.

First, the main CPU 93 sets a reel effect pattern according to the game lock flag (S901). The reel effect pattern corresponding to the game lock flag of the present embodiment is a reel effect in which a time retrogression reel action (before the stop operation) and a time retrogression reel action (after the stop operation) are set as one set (specific display row effect). Data for. When this reel effect pattern is set, the time for one set is set in the lock timer.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the lock timer is "0" (S902). In S902, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the lock timer is "0" (when the determination in S902 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the lock process at the start of the game and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 78). (See), move to S11.

On the other hand, in S902, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the lock timer is not "0" (when the determination in S902 is NO), the reel effect pattern of the main CPU 93 is a time-traveling reel action (before the stop operation). Whether or not it is determined (S903).

When the content of the reel effect pattern during the game lock is a time-traveling reel action (before the stop operation), the same process as the rotation process (acceleration process) for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R forward, which is performed in a normal game. Is done. That is, when the time-traveling reel action (before the stop operation) is performed, it is the same as the reel action from the start operation to the activation of the stop button when performing a normal game. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether or not the game lock has occurred immediately after the start operation (lever on).

Further, when the content of the reel effect pattern is a time-traveling reel action (after the stop operation), a rotation process for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the reverse direction is performed. The time retroactive reel action (before the stop operation) shows a specific example of the first reel action according to the gaming machine of the present invention, and the time retroactive reel action (after the stop operation) is the second reel related to the gaming machine of the present invention. A specific example of the action is shown.

In S903, when the main CPU 93 determines that the reel effect pattern is not a time-traveling reel action (before the stop operation) (when the determination in S903 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the processing to S902 and performs the processing after S902. repeat.

When the value of the lock timer is not "0" and the reel effect pattern is not the time-traveling reel action (before the stop operation), it corresponds to the case where the reel effect pattern is the time-traveling reel action (after the stop operation). Therefore, in this case, the reel effect in which the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate in the reverse direction is performed.

On the other hand, in S903, when the main CPU 93 determines that the reel effect pattern is a time-traveling reel action (before the stop operation) (when the determination in S903 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is a pressing operation on the stop button. (S904). When the main CPU 93 determines in S904 that there is no pressing operation on the stop button (when the determination in S904 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S902 and repeats the processes after S902.

If the reel effect pattern corresponding to the game lock flag is set and there is no pressing operation on the stop button during the time retrogression reel action (before the stop operation), the time retrogression reel action (stop) is performed after a certain period of time has elapsed. After the operation) is started. That is, when the rotation process of rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the forward direction is performed for a certain period of time, the rotation process of rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the reverse direction is performed.

On the other hand, in S904, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is a pressing operation on the stop button (when the determination in S904 is YES), the main CPU 93 rewrites the reel effect pattern and the lock timer (S905). After the processing of S905, the main CPU 93 returns the processing to S902 and repeats the processing after S902.

If the press operation on the stop button is performed before the rotation process for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the forward direction is completed (before the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotated in the reverse direction), the game lock flag is set. The execution of the reel effect pattern (specific display column effect) is interrupted, and another reel effect pattern (predetermined display column effect) is executed. That is, the type of reel effect pattern is rewritten. The content of the reel effect pattern to be rewritten (predetermined display column effect) in the present embodiment is the same as the time retrogression reel action (after the stop operation), and the value of the lock timer to be rewritten is the time retrogression reel action (after the stop operation). Same as the time to do.

That is, if a pressing operation is performed on the stop button during the execution of the time-traveling reel action (before the stop operation), the time-traveling reel action (before the stop operation) is not executed to the end and the time-traveling reel action (stop operation) is performed. Later) is executed. Therefore, if the player presses the stop button while the time-traveling reel action (before the stop operation) is being executed, the game lock for the remaining time of the time-traveling reel action (before the stop operation) is shortened. Reel.

Even if the stop button is pressed during the time-traveling reel action (after the stop operation), the reel effect pattern and the lock timer are not rewritten.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game lock is started, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate (time retrogression reel action (before the stop operation)) as in a normal game. Then, when the player performs a stop operation (pressing operation on the stop button), the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are not stopped, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate in the reverse direction (time retrogression reel action (after the stop operation)). To do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether or not the game lock has been generated immediately after the start operation, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that the game lock will occur. Then, the player recognizes that the game lock has occurred immediately after the stop operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned fixed time is set to be slightly longer than the time from the start operation to the activation of the stop button. As a result, if the player does not stop by the time required to activate the stop button, the game lock has occurred before the time required to activate the stop button has elapsed. It can be prevented from being recognized by the player. Further, if the player performs the stop operation immediately after the time until the stop button is activated has elapsed, the player can be made to think that the game lock has occurred immediately after the stop operation.

As a result, if it is thought that the normal game has been started based on the detection of the start operation (lever on), the player can be made to recognize (misidentify) that the game lock has suddenly occurred, and the game lock is related to the game lock. The effect can be enhanced. In addition, although the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are thought to be stopped by the stop operation, the stop operation is actually disabled, and the time-traveling reel action (after the stop operation) in a specific display column effect or a predetermined display column effect is performed. ) Is executed, the player can be made to feel a big surprise, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In S905, the rewritable reel effect pattern (predetermined display row effect) is not limited to the reverse rotation reel action, and can be appropriately set. Further, in S905, the reel effect pattern and the lock timer to be rewritten may be determined by lottery.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to rewrite the reel effect pattern and the lock timer based on the type of the time-traveling reel action and the presence or absence of the stop operation. However, the gaming machine of the present invention rewrites the reel effect pattern and the lock timer based on the time elapsed since the reel effect pattern corresponding to the game lock flag was started (set) and the presence or absence of the stop operation. You may decide whether or not. The time elapsed since the reel effect pattern corresponding to the game lock flag is started (set) may be detected by providing a separate timer, and it is detected that the value of the lock timer becomes a specific value. You may grasp with.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time retroactive reel action (after the stop operation) is started when a certain time elapses after the time retroactive reel action (before the stop operation) is started. However, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the time retroactive reel action (before the stop operation) is executed until the stop operation is performed, and when the stop operation is performed, the time retroactive reel action (after the stop operation) is performed. It may be a configuration to be started. At this time, the count of the lock timer is stopped so that the period for performing the game lock does not end when a predetermined time elapses (the lock timer becomes 0).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of the time retrogression reel action (after the stop operation), the rotation process of rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the reverse direction is performed. However, the time-traveling reel action (after the stop operation), that is, the fluctuation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the case of the second reel action, for example, causes the symbol to vibrate by alternately repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation. It may be one, and can be set arbitrarily.

3. Third Embodiment Next, a pachi-slot machine, which is a gaming machine showing the third embodiment of the present invention, will be described.

The pachislot machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the same configuration as the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. The difference between the pachislot machine according to the third embodiment and the pachislot machine 1 is the front door 2b. Therefore, here, the front door 2b in the pachislot machine according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 135.

FIG. 135 is a plan view of the front door 302b in the pachislot machine according to the third embodiment as viewed from the front (player side). As shown in FIG. 135, it includes a door body, a front panel 310, and a liquid crystal display device 11 showing a specific example of the display device. The front panel 310 and the liquid crystal display device 11 are attached to the upper part of the door body.

The liquid crystal display device 11 has a display unit 11a formed in a quadrangle shape, and executes an effect by displaying an image. A touch sensor module is arranged on the entire surface of the display unit 11a. This touch sensor module is a surface type capacitance type touch sensor like the touch sensor module 31 according to the first embodiment. Therefore, a touch input unit 331a using a touch sensor module is configured on the entire surface of the display unit 11a.

The size of the front panel 310 is set to cover the liquid crystal display device 11. The front panel 310 is arranged so as to be superimposed on the display unit 11a side of the liquid crystal display device 11, and is formed in a frame shape having a panel opening 310a for exposing the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11.

The front panel 310 is provided with an LED (Light Emitting Diode) group 21 and a decorative unit 321. The LED group 21 turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the content of the effect. The movable decorative unit 321 is located substantially in the center of the upper side of the front panel 310, has an LED (Light Emitting Diode) (not shown), and is shown in FIG. 135 by a drive motor and a drive mechanism (not shown). It is possible to move down from the standby position to the effect position in front of the display unit 11a and to vibrate at the standby position. The movable decoration unit 321 lights up in a color and a light emitting pattern corresponding to the content of the effect, for example, when a suction effect described later is performed.

A pedestal portion 12 is formed in the center of the front door 302b. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with a symbol display area 304 and various devices to be operated by the player.

The display window 304 is arranged on the front side superimposing on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is provided corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The display window 304 functions as a display window, and has a configuration capable of transmitting the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the display window 304.

When the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 is stopped, the display window 4 has the upper, middle, and lower stages of the plurality of types of symbols of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the frame. One symbol (three in total) is displayed in each area. In the present embodiment, a pseudo line formed by combining any of three predetermined regions of the upper, middle, and lower tiers facing the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R of the display window 4 is won. It is defined as a line (winning judgment line) to be judged whether or not.

Further, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a medal insertion slot 13, a MAX bet button 14, a 1-bet button 15, a start lever 16, a stop button 17L, 17C, 17R, and a production button 322, which are to be operated by the player. .. The medal insertion slot 13, the MAX bet button 14, the 1 bet button 15, the start lever 16, and the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The effect button 322 can be used as an input means when, for example, an enlargement effect, a transparency change effect, or a swelling appearance, which will be described later, is performed.

As in the first embodiment, a medal payout outlet 18, a medal tray 19, speakers 20L, 20R, and the like are provided at the lower part of the door body (see FIG. 2). The LED group 21, the movable decoration unit 321 and the speakers 20L and 20R are specific examples of the effect device according to the present invention.

[Operation of touch input section]
Next, a basic investigation of the touch input unit 331a will be described.

-Tap operation The tap operation is an operation of tapping the touch input unit 331a with a finger. This tap operation corresponds to a click operation with a mouse, which is one of the input means. The tap operation may be an operation corresponding to the pressing operation of the effect button 322 according to the present embodiment.

-Double tap operation The double tap operation is an operation of tapping the touch input unit 331a twice. This tap operation corresponds to a double-click operation with a mouse, which is one of the input means. The double tap operation may be an operation corresponding to the pressing operation of the effect button 322 according to the present embodiment, or may be an operation corresponding to the repeated hitting operation of the output button 322, for example.

-Long tap operation The long tap operation is an operation of touching the touch input unit 331a, and is an operation of touching the touch input unit 331a for a longer time than the operation time (touch time) in the above-mentioned tap operation. This long tap operation can also be referred to as, for example, a touch and hold operation or a long press operation. The long tap operation may be an operation corresponding to the effect button 322 according to the present embodiment.

-Drag operation The drag operation is an operation of moving a finger while touching the touch input unit 331a. This drag operation corresponds to a drag operation with a mouse, which is one of the input means. In the present embodiment, a flick operation for quickly moving a finger on the touch input unit 331a and a swipe operation for sliding a finger to a key to be input are positioned as operations equivalent to a drag operation.

-Multi-tap operation Multi-tap operation is a general term for operations in which a plurality of fingers touch the touch input unit 331a. The multi-tap operation includes a rotation operation, a pinch-out operation, a pinch-in operation, and the like. The rotation operation includes an operation of turning the other finger touching the touch input unit 331a with one finger touching the touch input unit 331a as a fulcrum. The pinch-out operation is an operation of expanding the space between two fingers touching the touch input unit 331a to expand a predetermined area. The pinch-in operation is an operation of shrinking a predetermined area by shrinking the space between two fingers touching the touch input unit 331a.

[Various effects using the touch input section]
Next, various effects performed by using the touch input unit 31a will be described with reference to the drawings.

(1) State Suggestion Touch Effect First, a state suggestion touch effect for notifying a state suggestion using the touch input unit 331a will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a state suggestion touch effect using the touch input unit 331a in the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention.

In the present embodiment, the lottery results of the ART lottery process in BB (S566 in FIG. 104) and the ART lottery process in RB (S571) are suggested by the state suggestion touch effect. That is, the result of the ART lottery in the present embodiment shows a specific example of the "state" according to the present invention. The "state" according to the present invention is not limited to the result of the ART lottery, and may be various information to be notified to the player. Examples of the "state" according to the present invention include winning a bonus, determining the number of additional games for ART, and shifting modes.

In the present embodiment, the state suggestion touch effect is executed during BB and RB, and the animal image 351 and the girl image 352 are displayed on the display unit 11a. The animal image 351 shows a specific example of the first display object according to the present invention, and the girl image 352 shows a specific example of the second display object according to the present invention. The animal image 351 is displayed in the first region provided at the lower left side of the display unit 11a. Further, the image 352 of the girl is displayed in the second area provided at the lower right side of the display unit 11a.

The first region and the second region are outside the moving range of the movable decoration unit 321 and are set to positions where the player's finger does not come into contact with the movable decoration unit 321 even if the movable decoration unit 321 moves during a touch operation. It is desirable from the viewpoint of safety. By designing in this way, even if the movable decoration unit 321 is moved according to the touch operation, the movable decoration unit 321 can be suppressed while suppressing the risk of contact between the player's finger and the movable decoration unit 321. The effect of moving the finger becomes feasible.

In executing the effect, the sub-control board 42 refers to the state (ART winning or non-winning) before accepting the tap operation to determine whether or not to execute the response effect, and the content of the response effect to be performed when the response effect is executed. To determine. If the response effect is not executed, even if the process itself corresponding to the subsequent tap operation is not performed, the response effect is performed after proceeding with the same process as when it is decided to execute the response effect. As one aspect, even if "no effect" is executed, either process may be used as long as the player can recognize that no response effect has occurred. Then, after the decision as to whether or not to execute the response effect is made, the tap operation by the player can be accepted at a predetermined timing.

When the player performs a tap operation (or a long tap operation) on either the first area where the animal image 351 is displayed or the second area where the girl image 352 is displayed, the tapped area. If is the area where it is determined to execute the response effect, the determined response effect is executed. On the other hand, if the tapped area is an area where it is determined not to execute the response effect, the response effect is not executed. In the present embodiment, as a response effect, a dialogue effect suggesting a state is output from the speakers 20L and 20R.

As the dialogue production, a first dialogue production, a second dialogue production, a third dialogue production, a fourth dialogue production, and a first dialogue production are provided. When the first dialogue effect is executed, the accuracy suggesting the ART winning is "none (0%)", and when the second dialogue effect is executed, the accuracy suggesting the ART winning is "low". is there.

When the third dialogue effect is executed, the accuracy of suggesting the ART winning is "medium", and when the fourth dialogue effect is executed, the accuracy of suggesting the ART winning is "high". Further, when the fifth dialogue effect is executed, the accuracy of suggesting the ART winning is "determined". That is, the player can recognize that the ART has not won when the first dialogue effect is executed, and can recognize that the ART has won when the fifth dialogue effect is executed. ..

Further, when the third dialogue effect is executed, the winning of ART is expected as compared with the case where the second dialogue effect is executed. Then, when the fourth dialogue effect is executed, the winning of ART is expected as compared with the case where the third dialogue production is executed.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the relationship between the display object and the presence / absence of the dialogue effect according to the state suggestion accuracy. “◯” (circle) shown in FIG. 137 indicates that the response effect is performed, and “−” indicates that the response effect is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 137, in determining the response effect, the ratio of the tap investigation target determined to have the response effect differs between the first region and the second region. When the tap investigation target is the first area where the animal image 351 is displayed, the dialogue effect (response effect) having the state suggestion accuracy of "low" or "none" does not occur as the type of response effect. On the other hand, when the tap investigation target is the second area in which the image 352 of the girl is displayed, the determination with the response effect is made so that the dialogue effect (response effect) is always executed.

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the relationship between the state suggestion accuracy and the appearance magnification.
The state A shown in FIG. 138 is a state in which the ART is not won, and the state B is a state in which the ART is won.

As shown in FIG. 138, assuming that the case where the first serif effect having the state suggestion accuracy of "none" is determined in the state A is "1", the state suggestion accuracy is "none" in the state B. The magnification X at which the first serif effect is determined satisfies the following equation 1.
X = 1 ... (Equation 1)
That is, in the case of the state A and the case of the state B, the first serif effect having the state suggestion accuracy of "none" is determined with the same probability.

Further, assuming that the case where the second serif effect having the state suggestion accuracy of "low" is determined in the state A is "1", the second serif effect having the state suggestion accuracy of "low" in the state B is set. The magnification X at which is determined satisfies the following equation 2.
1.05 ≧ X> 2 ... (Equation 2)
Therefore, the probability that the second serif effect with the state suggestion accuracy of "low" is determined in the state B is the probability that the second serif effect with the state suggestion accuracy of "low" is determined in the state A. Higher than.

Further, assuming that the case where the third serif effect having the state suggestion accuracy of "medium" is determined in the state A is "1", the third serif effect having the state suggestion accuracy of "medium" in the state B is set to "1". The magnification X at which is determined satisfies the following equation 3.
2 ≧ X> 1.05 ・ ・ ・ (Equation 3)
Therefore, the probability that the third serif effect with the state suggestion accuracy of "medium" is determined in the state B is the probability that the third serif effect with the state suggestion accuracy of "medium" is determined in the state A. Higher than.

Further, assuming that the case where the fourth serif effect having the state suggestion accuracy of "high" is determined in the state A is "1", the fourth serif effect having the state suggestion accuracy of "high" in the state B is set to "1". The magnification X at which is determined satisfies the following equation 4.
X> 2 ... (Equation 4)
Therefore, the probability that the fourth serif effect with the state suggestion accuracy of "high" is determined in the state B is the probability that the fourth serif effect with the state suggestion accuracy of "high" is determined in the state A. Higher than.

In the case of the state A, the fifth dialogue effect in which the state suggestion accuracy is "determined" is not determined. On the other hand, in the case of the state B, the fifth serif effect in which the state suggestion accuracy is "determined" is determined. Therefore, when the fifth serif effect whose state suggestion accuracy is "determined" is executed, it is determined that the state is B.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the relationship between the state suggestion accuracy, the appearance probability, and the degree of expectation.
As shown in FIG. 139, in the present embodiment, the probabilities (appearance probabilities) that the states A and the states B are determined when the state suggestion accuracy is “low” are set to 1/100, respectively. The probability that the state B is determined (appearance probability) is set to 1/100 regardless of the state suggestion accuracy.

Further, the value of X when the state suggestion accuracy is "low" is set to "1.05", and the probability (appearance probability) that the state A is determined is set to 1/105. When the state suggestion accuracy is "medium", the value of X is set to "2", and the probability that the state A is determined (appearance probability) is set to 1/200. When the state suggestion accuracy is "high", the value of X is set to "6", and the probability that the state A is determined (appearance probability) is set to 1/600.

The "expectation degree at the time of appearance of the effect" shown in FIG. 139 is the probability of the "state (winning or non-winning of ART)" when the response effect (speech effect) corresponding to the state suggestion accuracy is executed. For example, when the first dialogue effect with the state suggestion accuracy of "none" is executed, the probability of being in state A (ART non-winning) is 50%, and the probability of being in state B (ART winning) is 50%. is there.

Further, when the second dialogue effect with the state suggestion accuracy of "low" is executed, the probability of being in state A (ART non-winning) is 49%, and the probability of being in state B (ART winning) is 51%. is there. In addition, when the third dialogue effect with the state suggestion accuracy of "medium" is executed, the probability of being in state A (ART non-winning) is 33%, and the probability of being in state B (ART winning) is 67%. is there.

In addition, when the fourth dialogue effect with the state suggestion accuracy of "high" is executed, the probability of being in state A (ART non-winning) is 14%, and the probability of being in state B (ART winning) is 86%. is there. Then, when the fifth serif effect in which the state suggestion accuracy is "determined" is executed, the probability of being in the state B (ART winning) is 100%.

In the state suggestion touch effect, a first area in which the animal image 351 is displayed and a second area in which the girl image 352 is displayed are provided so that the player can select the target to be tapped (or long tapped). did. Thereby, for example, the player who is resistant to the tap operation on the second area where the image 352 of the girl is displayed can tap the first area where the image 351 of the animal is displayed. As a result, it is possible to encourage participation in the production using the touch sensor module, and it is possible to improve the interest of the production using the touch sensor module.

In the present embodiment, the tap operation for the first region and the second region is effective only once for either one. For example, when the tap operation for the first region and the second region is detected at the same time, it is treated as if the tap operation for the second region where the response effect occurs frequently is performed.

Further, when the tap operation is performed on the first area where the animal image 351 is displayed, it is determined that the response effect is performed when the state suggestion accuracy is "medium" or higher, and the state suggestion accuracy is "medium" or higher. In the case of "low" or "none", it is not decided to perform the response effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a response effect (so-called “lively effect”) in which the state suggestion accuracy is low and the accuracy suggesting that the state B (ART winning) is advantageous for the player.

Therefore, in the state suggestion touch effect, the animal image 351 is displayed to the player who prefers that the response effect with low accuracy suggesting that the state B (ART winning) is advantageous to the player is infrequent. The notification that the tap operation is recommended for the first area is performed. This makes it possible to encourage participation in the production using the touch sensor module.

In the state suggestion touch effect according to the present embodiment, a dialogue effect is adopted as a response effect. However, as the response effect according to the present invention, for example, a light emission effect using the LED group 21, a video effect using the liquid crystal display device 11, a movable effect or light emission effect using the movable decoration unit 321, or a sound. It may be a production that combines light and video.

As the state suggestion touch effect according to the present invention, for example, a specific response effect may be performed by combining a video effect using the liquid crystal display device 11 and a dialogue effect using the speakers 20L and 20R. In this specific response effect, for example, the animal image 351 or the girl image 352 operates according to the state suggestion accuracy, and outputs the dialogue according to the state suggestion accuracy.

When the tap operation is performed on the first area where the animal image 351 is displayed, the specific response effect of "low" or "none" of the state suggestion accuracy does not occur. However, in this case, the dialogue effect is not executed, and only the video effect (response effect) in which the animal image 351 operates is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the tap operation is detected by the operation of the animal image 351 and recognize that the state suggestion accuracy is "low" or "none" due to the absence of the dialogue effect. Can be made to.

In the state suggestion touch effect according to the present embodiment, when the tap operation is performed on the first area where the animal image 351 is displayed, the state suggestion accuracy is "low" or "none" (specification). Response effect) does not occur. However, as the state suggestion touch effect according to the present invention, the state suggestion accuracy in which the response effect (specific response effect) is not determined can be arbitrarily set. For example, when a tap operation is performed on the first area, if an effect other than "fixed" is determined as the type of response effect (specific response effect), the response effect (specific response effect) May not be decided to do.

In the present embodiment, it can be said that the presence or absence of the response effect changes depending on which category of "none", "low", "medium", "high", and "confirmed" the effect belongs to in the classification of the suggestion accuracy. In the production design of the game machine, it is necessary to adjust the balance of appearance frequency so that both the player who operates the first area and the player who operates the second area are assumed to be more interesting in both game styles. There is.

For example, in the case where a lottery table for determining each of the effects that finally appear is specified at one time, both a player who operates the first area and a player who operates the second area are assumed. When calculating the frequency of appearance of effects, it is necessary to classify and add up the categories of each effect. Therefore, the calculation process becomes complicated, and the time spent for balance adjustment becomes enormous.

Therefore, in the process of determining the effect such as the effect lottery, the specification is set so that the category is first determined, and then the effect to be finally executed in the same category is determined. As a result, it is easy to obtain the effect appearance rate for each category, and it is easy to calculate the response effect appearance rate assuming players with different tastes, which leads to shortening of the development period.

As a specific example, first, in the first lottery (directing category lottery), a category is determined from "none", "low", "medium", "high", and "confirmed". Here, for example, it is assumed that "low" is determined. After that, in the second lottery (production content lottery), the production to appear from among "low production A", "low production B", "low production C", etc. belonging to "low" is determined. Here, when the "low effect C" is determined, the "low effect C" can be executed.

In this case, when the player taps the first area, "low effect C" is not performed, and when the player taps the second area, "low effect C" is performed. In the category determination, "None" and "Low" that do not respond when tapping the first area are set as the first group, and the others are set as the second group, and the first lottery is roughly performed according to the presence or absence of the response effect. It may be what you do.

Further, in the state suggestion touch effect according to the present embodiment, the animal image 351 is displayed in the first region, and the girl image 352 is displayed in the second region. However, as the state suggestion touch effect according to the present invention, the images to be displayed in the first region and the second region can be arbitrarily set. Further, the images displayed in the first region and the second region do not necessarily have to be different, and may be the same image.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ART lottery process in BB (S566 in FIG. 104) and the ART lottery process in RB (S571 in FIG. 104) are performed every game. Therefore, the state suggestion touch effect can always be performed during BB or RB. However, the state suggestion touch effect according to the present invention may be performed when a specific condition is satisfied. Specific conditions include, for example, a case where an ART is won, a case where ART non-winning continues until a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) is reached, a case where it is decided to perform a state suggestion touch effect by lottery, and the like. Can be mentioned.

(2) Suction effect Next, a suction effect performed by using the touch input unit 331a will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 147. FIGS. 140 to 142 are views showing a state of a suction effect using the touch input unit 331a in the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention.

In the present embodiment, when ART is not won during BB or RB, it is suggested that the suction effect is executed after the end of BB or after the end of RB to obtain a causal value. In the present embodiment, there is a possibility that a value called "causal value" is obtained not only when the ART is not won, but also in various situations where the interest of the game is lowered (the player feels uncomfortable).

The given causal value is counted by the causal value counter, and a privilege advantageous to the player is given based on the accumulated "causal value". Therefore, even if there is a situation in which the interest of the game is lowered, there is a possibility that advantageous benefits can be obtained after that. The "causal value" according to the present invention may be a predetermined value or may be determined by lottery.

When the "causal value" is given and the suction effect is executed, a notification prompting the user to perform a long tap operation (long press) at a desired point on the display unit 11a is performed. Examples of the notification prompting the long tap operation of the desired point include voices output from the speakers 20L and 20R, characters displayed on the display unit 11a, and the like.

When the player makes a long tap operation with a finger at a desired point on the display unit 11a, the touch input unit 331a acquires the touch coordinates, and the black mist image 354 is displayed in a predetermined area including the touch coordinates. The black mist image 354 is a specific example of a predetermined image according to the present invention. The image 354 of the black mist spreads out in a circle in a predetermined area so as to exude from the finger operated by long tapping until a specific period elapses (see FIG. 140). This specific period can be set arbitrarily.

After that, the black mist image 354 proceeds so as to extend toward the decoration unit 321 and reaches the upper side of the display unit 11a and disappears (see FIG. 142). On the other hand, the decoration unit 321 lights up in a dim color light emitting pattern according to the timing when the black mist image 354 reaches the upper side of the display unit 11a and disappears. Examples of the light emission pattern of this dim color include black and gray (gray).

As a result, the image 354 of the black mist can be made to appear as if it was sucked into the decoration unit 321. As a result, it is possible to express that the "causal value" obtained in various situations where the interest of the game is lowered (the player feels uncomfortable) is sucked into the decoration unit 321.

143 to 145 are explanatory views showing a method of displaying an image of a suction effect.
As shown in FIG. 143, the video data displayed by the suction effect represents an image 354 of a black mist generated from the display unit 11a and traveling straight upward. In the present embodiment, the black mist image 354 displayed by the video data is tilted according to the touch coordinates so that the black mist image 354 moves toward the decoration unit 321.

When a desired point on the display unit 11a is operated by long tapping, the touch coordinates are detected. Then, the position where the black mist image 354 is generated is displaced from the center to the touch coordinates (see FIG. 144). In the video data at this point, the black mist image 354 moves straight up from the touch coordinates. That is, the black mist image 354 advances along a line substantially perpendicular to the upper side of the display unit 11a.

Next, the angle of the line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates is calculated, and the image 354 of the black mist traveling straight upward from the touch coordinates is tilted (see FIG. 145). As a result, video data is created in which the black mist image 354 moves toward the decoration unit 321. In the present embodiment, the goal coordinates are set at the center of the decoration unit 321 arranged outside the display unit 11a.

The angle of the line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates can be calculated using trigonometric functions. In the present embodiment, the center coordinate of the display unit 11a is (0,0), the left side of the display unit 11a is −640, and the right side of the display unit 11a is 640. Further, the upper side of the display unit 11a is 360, and the lower side of the display unit 11a is -360. Further, the center coordinates of the decoration unit 321 are set to (0,460).

Then, based on the touch coordinates and the center coordinates (0,460) of the decoration unit 321, the angle of the line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates is calculated by a trigonometric function. For example, when the touch coordinates are (460,0), the angle of the line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates is 60 degrees.

FIG. 146 shows the movement route of the black mist image 354 when the touch coordinates are detected in the lower left side of the display unit 11a.
As shown in FIG. 146, when the touch coordinates are detected in the lower left side of the display unit 11a, the line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates is the portion where the decoration unit 321 and the upper side of the display unit 11a meet (the central portion in the upper side). ). Therefore, the image 354 of the black mist appears to be sucked into the decorative unit 321 through the central portion on the upper side of the display unit 11a.

FIG. 147 shows the movement route of the black mist image 354 when the touch coordinates are detected in the upper left side of the display unit 11a.
As shown in FIG. 147, when the touch coordinates are detected in the upper left side of the display unit 11a, the line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates is the portion where the decoration unit 321 and the upper side of the display unit 11a are in contact with the display unit 11a. It passes through the middle of the upper left corner. Therefore, the black mist image 354 appears to pass through the left side of the central portion on the upper side of the display unit 11a, exit the display unit 11a, and then be sucked into the decoration unit 321.

In the suction effect, no matter which point on the display unit 11a is operated by long tapping, it is possible to display an image in which the image 354 of the black mist advances from the touch coordinates toward the goal coordinates (center of the decoration unit 321). As a result, the player can arbitrarily determine the point where the black mist image 354 is generated, and the interest of the production using the touch sensor module can be improved.

Further, in the suction effect, the same image is used as the image 354 of the black mist advances by making the moving angle of the image 354 of the black mist different. As a result, the amount of data can be suppressed as compared with the case where a plurality of video data in which the black mist image 354 advances are provided according to the touch coordinates, and the video control process can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, in the suction effect, the image 354 of the black mist spreads out in a circle in a predetermined area so as to exude from the finger operated by the long tap operation until a specific period elapses. As a result, it is possible to make the image 354 of the black mist appear from the player's finger, and it is possible to improve the interest of the production using the touch sensor module.

The image 354 of the black mist that appears after the touch coordinates are detected is tilted at the angle of advance at the time of appearance. However, since the image 354 of the black mist spreads out in a circle so as to exude, it is difficult to understand that the image 354 of the black mist that has appeared is tilted. As a result, after the black mist image 354 spreads, it can appear to be smoothly sucked into the decoration unit 321.

In the suction effect according to the present embodiment, the goal coordinates are set in the decorative unit 321 arranged outside the display unit 11a. However, as the suction effect according to the present invention, the goal coordinates may be set on any side of the display unit 11a.

Further, in the suction effect according to the present embodiment, the image 354 of the black mist is made to spread in a circle. However, in the suction effect according to the present invention, the shape of the image spreading around the touch coordinates can be arbitrarily set. The shape of the image spreading around the touch coordinates is preferably a shape in which it is difficult to understand that the image is tilted in the traveling direction, and for example, a polygon close to a circle may be used.

Further, in the suction effect according to the present embodiment, the area of the black mist image 354 spreading in a predetermined area including the touch coordinates is made the same. However, as the suction effect according to the present invention, the area of the black mist image 354 spreading in the predetermined area may be changed according to the given causal value (granted privilege). For example, the area of the black mist image 354 may be proportional to the causal value. In this case, the player can estimate the size of the causal value (granted privilege) given by the size of the black mist image 354, and improve the interest of the production using the touch sensor module. Can be done.

Up to this point, the movable decoration unit 321 is abbreviated as the decoration unit 321, and the suction effect in the mode in which the movable decoration unit 321 is arranged in the standby position has been described. Hereinafter, the suction effect in the movable mode of the movable decorative unit 321 will be described.

The first effect pattern is to cause the movable decoration unit 321 to perform a long tap operation after moving (descending) to the effect position. When the suction effect of the first effect pattern is executed, first, the movable decoration unit 321 moves from the standby position to the effect position in front of the display unit 11a, and the hand or face should not be brought close to the moving area. Warning is displayed on the display unit 11a, and a warning sound calling attention to the player is output.

A distance measuring sensor such as an infrared sensor may be provided in the vicinity of the movable decoration unit 321 so that it can detect whether or not the player's hand or face is in the moving area of the movable decoration unit 321. When a hand, a face, or the like is detected, the safety can be enhanced by delaying the movement of the movable decoration unit 321 until the effect is stopped or the effect is not detected.

Next, at least a part of the movable decorative unit 321 descends to an effect position where it overlaps with the display unit 11a in a front view. After that, since it is difficult to tap the point where the movable decoration unit 321 overlaps, a notification is given to urge the long tap operation to be performed at a desired point other than the point where the movable decoration unit 321 overlaps.

When the player makes a long tap operation with a finger at a desired point on the display unit 11a, a black mist image 354 (see FIG. 140) is displayed in a predetermined area including the touch coordinates. Then, the black mist image 354 proceeds so as to extend toward the movable decoration unit 321 at the effect position, reaches the movable decoration unit 321 and disappears. The movable decoration unit 321 lights up in a dim color light emitting pattern according to the timing at which the black mist image 354 disappears.

As a result, the image 354 of the black mist can be made to appear as if it was sucked into the movable decoration unit 321. The angle at which the black mist image 354 moves is calculated with the center coordinates of the movable decoration unit 321 at the effect position as the goal coordinates. The method for determining the angle is as described above except that the goal coordinates are different.

Then, after the black mist image 354 appears to have been sucked into the movable decoration unit 321, the movable decoration unit 321 moves from the production position to the standby position, and the hand or face should not be brought close to the moving area. Warning is displayed on the display unit 11a, and a warning sound calling attention to the player is output. After that, the movable decoration unit 321 is raised and placed in the standby position, and the suction effect is completed. In this way, by combining the movable accessory production and the touch panel production, a powerful production becomes possible.

The second effect pattern is that the movable decoration unit 321 moves (descends) to the effect position after the tap operation. When the suction effect of the second effect pattern is executed, first, a notification prompting the user to perform a long tap operation at a desired point is performed. When the player makes a long tap operation with a finger at a desired point on the display unit 11a, a black mist image 354 (see FIG. 140) is displayed in a predetermined area including the touch coordinates and stays there.

Next, a warning that the movable decoration unit 321 moves from the standby position to the effect position and that the hand or face should not be brought close to the moving area is displayed on the display unit 11a to call attention to the player. Sound is output. After that, the movable decoration unit 321 is lowered and arranged at the effect position. At this time, if the black mist image 354 is in a position where it overlaps with the effect position of the movable decoration unit 321, the black mist image 354 is not superimposed on the effect position so as not to be obstructed by the movable decoration unit 321 and disappear. A save display is displayed to move to the position.

Next, the black mist image 354 proceeds so as to extend from the current position toward the movable decoration unit 321 at the effect position, reaches the movable decoration unit 321 and disappears. The movable decoration unit 321 lights up in a dim color light emitting pattern according to the timing at which the black mist image 354 disappears. After that, after the warning as in the first effect pattern, the movable decoration unit 321 is raised, placed in the standby position, and the suction effect is completed.

If the black mist image 354 is displayed at a position too close to the movable decoration unit 321 at the effect position, the time for showing the movement of the black mist image 354 is shortened. Therefore, in the first effect pattern, a predetermined range close to the movable decoration unit 321 at the effect position is set as an area where tap operation is not detected. Further, in the second effect pattern, the evacuation position to be moved at the time of the evacuation display is set to a position separated from the movable decorative unit 321 at the effect position by a predetermined distance.

In the third effect pattern, the movable decorative unit 321 vibrates in the standby position due to the excitation of the motor. The timing to start the vibration can be arbitrarily set before the start of the suction effect, when the suction effect is started, when the tap operation is detected, when the suction display is performed, and the like. For example, the occurrence of the suction effect may be suggested or notified by vibrating before the start of the suction effect. Further, the vibration of the movable decorative unit 321 may be generated when the accumulated "causal value" reaches a predetermined value.

In the third effect pattern, since there is little risk that the movable decoration unit 321 touches the player's finger or the like during the tap operation, it is not necessary to output a warning display or a warning sound before the movable decoration unit 321 operates. .. Further, the third effect pattern (vibration of the movable decoration unit 321) may be combined with the first effect pattern or the second effect pattern.

It should be noted that the movable decoration unit 321 is moved in case the movable decoration unit 321 does not move due to the disengagement of the gears of the drive mechanism or a trouble such as a motor failure. It is desirable to display an insurance image imitating the movable decoration unit 321 according to the operation mode of the movable decoration unit 321 in the moving area and the area of the display unit 11a corresponding to the effect position at the timing of the effect position.

By providing the insurance image, even if the movable decorative unit 321 does not move, the player can generally recognize what kind of effect is being performed as the suction effect, and the game can be continued. Also, for the black mist image, it is advisable to display the effect of moving and sucking (disappearing) assuming an insurance image. The insurance image may be displayed only when it is detected by the origin sensor (not shown) of the movable decoration unit 321 that it cannot be moved from the origin position, and even if it is not, the insurance image is displayed. May be good.

It is preferable that the movable decorative unit 321 has a structure in which the movable decorative unit 321 is locked by meshing gears at the standby position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from moving the movable decoration unit 321 up and down by hand, and it is possible to prevent a failure in the drive mechanism of the movable decoration unit 321. Further, it is possible to prevent the movable decorative unit 321 from unexpectedly falling due to the shaking of the housing generated by the game such as pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R and the effect button 322 (see FIG. 135).

In addition, when returning the movable decoration unit 321 from the production position to the standby position, rotate the motor of the drive mechanism more than the number of steps assuming the distance required for movement, and push the gear mesh slightly. Then, the lock is firmly applied, which is more preferable.

As described above, when the movable decoration unit 321 moves, a warning to keep hands and the like away from the moving area is displayed on the display unit 11a. However, on the demo screen that occurs while waiting for customers (standby), "there is a movement effect of the movable decoration unit 321 during the game", "location of the movement area", and "always a warning sound or warning display before moving". Since it will occur, it is advisable to display a warning such as "You can play with confidence when the warning does not occur."

As a result, it is possible to suppress a contact accident between the movable decoration unit 321 and the player, and it is possible to make the player want to see how the movable decoration unit 321 which is also a decoration part moves. As a result, it is possible to attract the interest of the player and increase the motivation to play.

In order to calibrate the touch panel (alignment for correctly detecting touch coordinates) when recovering from a power failure or on the menu screen, the administrator may be requested to perform a touch operation at a predetermined position on the touch panel. If the touch position at the time of calibration is also set to a position that avoids the moving area of the movable decoration unit 321, the contact risk can be reduced and the administrator can perform the touch operation with peace of mind.

(3) Enlargement effect Next, the enlargement effect performed by using the touch input unit 331a will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149. 148 and 149 are explanatory views showing an enlarged effect.

In the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an enlarged effect suggesting whether or not the player has won an internal winning combination that is advantageous to the player is executed. When the predetermined conditions are satisfied, it can be set arbitrarily. For example, when it is decided to perform the expansion effect by the lottery performed based on the internal winning combination, when the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the game Examples include the case where a person wins an internal winning role that is advantageous to the person.

Examples of the internal winning combination that is advantageous for the player include a rare winning combination, a bonus winning combination (BB, RB), and the like. The rare roles according to this embodiment are "strong bell" (winning number "27"), "watermelon" (winning number "34"), "weak cherry" (winning number "35"), and "strong cherry" (winning number "35"). Numbers "36") and "chance eyes" (win numbers "38" to "40") (see FIG. 19). If you win the role of rare, you are expected to win the CZ (chance zone) and bonus (see FIGS. 50 and 53).

The expanded effect according to the present invention is not limited to suggesting whether or not the player has won the internal winning combination, which is advantageous to the player, and may be various information to be notified to the player. Examples of the expansion effect according to the present invention include the number of additional games of ART, the mode of transition, and the like.

In the enlarged effect, first, a predetermined notification image 356 is displayed in a predetermined area of the display unit 11a, and a notification for urging the player to perform a pinch-out operation is performed on the predetermined area of the display unit 11a (see FIG. 148). Examples of the notification prompting the pinch-out operation include voice output from the speakers 20L and 20R, characters displayed on the display unit 11a, and the like.

The predetermined notification image 356 before the pinch-out operation has a first size and high transparency. Therefore, the player cannot recognize or recognize the content to be notified (suggestion of whether or not he / she has won the internal winning combination that is advantageous to the player) even if he / she sees the predetermined notification image 356 before performing the pinch-out operation. It's hard to do.

Since the predetermined notification image 356 cannot be recognized or is difficult to recognize, it may be unclear where the player may perform the pinch-out operation on the touch sensor module. In this case, it is desirable to display an operation position notification image (not shown) different from the predetermined notification image 356 on the display unit 11a so that the area where the operation can be accepted can be known.

As an example, it is possible to display an animation in which a pinch-out operation is performed with a finger in an area where operations can be accepted. In this case, since the position to be operated is known and the appropriate operation mode is known, the player can easily participate in the production using the touch sensor module. Further, the character displayed as the notification for prompting the pinch-out operation may have a role as an operation position notification image and be displayed at a position indicating an area where the operation can be accepted.

When the player performs the pinch-out operation, the predetermined notification image 356 is enlarged to a second size larger than the first size, and the transparency is lowered (see FIG. 149). At this time, the transparency of the predetermined notification image 356 becomes lower according to the enlargement ratio of the predetermined notification image 356. Therefore, as the predetermined broadcast image 356 is enlarged, the predetermined broadcast image 356 becomes visible. The operation position notification image and characters displayed as notifications prompting the pinch-out operation should be deleted when the pinch-out operation is detected so as not to interfere with the visibility of the enlarged display of the predetermined notification image 356. Is preferable.

As a result, the player can recognize the content to be notified represented by the predetermined notification image 356. In the present embodiment, the character "chance" is displayed when it is suggested that the player has won the internal winning combination, which is advantageous for the player. In addition, when it is suggested that the player has not won the internal winning combination, which is advantageous for the player, the character "sorry" is also displayed (not shown).

In addition, when characters such as "chance" and "sorry" are enlarged to a size that is sufficiently visible, or when they are enlarged to the maximum magnification, a production (voice output, decorative lamp emission, image display) that serves as a guide for completing the operation Etc.). As a result, the player can clearly recognize the opportunity to end the operation. The effect can be further enhanced by adjusting the effect according to the displayed characters, such as images and sounds that raise expectations for "chance" and images and sounds that seem to be lost if "disappointing". ..

If the player performs a pinch-in operation after the predetermined notification image 356 is enlarged to the second size or while the predetermined notification image 356 is being enlarged to the second size, the predetermined notification image 356 Is reduced to the first size and becomes more transparent.

As described above, in the enlarged effect, the size and transparency of the predetermined notification image 356 change based on the touch input information by the pinch-out operation and the pinch-in operation. As a result, it is possible to make the predetermined notification image 356 recognizable or unrecognizable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the production using the touch sensor module.

It should be noted that the operation acceptance period may end when the size is sufficiently visible or when the magnification is expanded to the maximum magnification, and subsequent operations may not be accepted. In addition, the operation acceptance period may end after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the production, and in order to notify the player that the acceptance of the operation has ended, the image prompting the operation and the operation position notification image should be deleted at the end of the operation acceptance period. Is desirable.

Further, when the effect button 322 (see FIG. 135) is pressed and held while the predetermined notification image 356 of the first size is displayed, the predetermined notification image 356 is displayed in the same manner as when the pinch-out operation is performed. It is enlarged to the second size and the transparency becomes low. As a result, the player can enjoy the effect using the touch sensor module without operating the touch input unit 331a.

When the effect button 322 is pressed and held, only the enlarged display (zoom-in) by the pinch-out operation is executed, and the reduced display (zoom-out) by the pinch-in operation is not executed. For example, when performing a pinch-out operation of the touch input unit 331a, if an operation error is made while enlarging the predetermined notification image 356, the pinch-in operation may be detected and the predetermined notification image 356 may be reduced. However, when the effect button 322 is pressed and held for a long time, only the enlarged display by the pinch-out operation is executed, so that the predetermined notification image 356 can be surely enlarged to the second size.

In the present embodiment, the size and transparency of the predetermined notification image 356 are changed based on the touch input information by the pinch-out operation and the pinch-in operation. However, as an effect using the touch sensor module according to the present invention, only the transparency of the predetermined notification image may be changed based on the touch input information by the pinch-out operation and the pinch-in operation.

In the transparency change effect that changes only the transparency of the predetermined notification image, first, the predetermined notification image is displayed in the predetermined area of the display unit 11a, and the player drags the predetermined notification image to the predetermined area in the first direction. A notification prompting the operation is performed. The predetermined notification image before the drag operation in the first direction has high transparency. Therefore, the player cannot recognize the content to be notified (suggestion of whether or not he / she has won the internal winning combination that is advantageous to the player) even if he / she sees the predetermined notification image before performing the drag operation in the first direction. Or it is hard to recognize.

When the player performs the drag operation in the first direction, the size of the predetermined notification image does not change and the transparency becomes low. At this time, the transparency of the predetermined notification image becomes lower according to the distance of the drag operation. Therefore, as the drag operation is continued, the predetermined notification image becomes visible. As a result, the player can recognize the content to be notified represented by the predetermined notification image.

When the player performs a drag operation in the second direction, which is the opposite direction to the first direction, after the transparency of the predetermined notification image becomes the lowest, or while the transparency of the predetermined notification image becomes low. , The transparency of the predetermined notification image becomes high, and the process returns to the initial unrecognizable state. As described above, even in the transparency change effect, it is possible to make the predetermined notification image recognizable or unrecognizable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the effect using the touch sensor module.

Further, also in the transparency change effect, if the effect button 322 (see FIG. 135) is pressed and held for a long time, the transparency of the predetermined notification image becomes low as in the case of performing the drag operation in the first direction. As a result, the player can enjoy the effect using the touch sensor module without operating the touch input unit 331a.

In the present embodiment, touch input information for enlarging or reducing the predetermined notification image 356 is obtained by the pinch-out operation and the pinch-in operation. However, as the enlargement effect according to the present invention, touch input information for enlarging or reducing the predetermined notification image 356 by other operations on the touch input unit 331a, for example, a drag operation, a long tap operation, a tap operation, or a double tap operation is obtained. You may.

Further, in the transparency change effect, touch input information for changing the transparency of a predetermined notification image is obtained by a drag operation. However, as the transparency change effect according to the present invention, a touch that changes the transparency of a predetermined notification image by other operations on the touch input unit 331a, for example, a pinch-out operation, a pinch-in operation, a long tap operation, a tap operation, or a double tap operation. Input information may be obtained.

Further, as the enlargement effect according to the present invention, an indicator indicating whether the image is being enlarged or reduced or a magnification may be displayed. Further, as the transparency change effect according to the present invention, an indicator indicating transparency or a percentage may be displayed.

In the present embodiment, the enlargement / reduction of the predetermined notification image 356 has been described, but the background image (not shown) may be changed according to the enlargement ratio of the predetermined notification image, and such an effect is accompanied. This will make the expansion more realistic. For example, the predetermined notification image 356 may be used as a character, and the background image may be used as a ship floating on a river. In this case, by pinching out the deck portion of the ship, the predetermined notification image 356 is enlarged so that the character on the ship can be identified.

Here, the background image is also zoomed as the character is enlarged. Specifically, the animation data that changes from reduction to enlargement may be retained, and the seek value (setting value for which frame is displayed) may be set according to the enlargement ratio. Before the operation, the picture was a bird's-eye view of the entire ship, but after the enlargement operation, the enlarged background image centered on the deck part and the character with improved visibility are combined to display a predetermined notification image on the deck of the ship. The picture is a standing character. Further, a character different from the character corresponding to the loss and the character corresponding to the chance may be provided to suggest the degree of expectation by the pose of a specific character or the like.

(4) Notification BGM selection effect Next, the notification BGM selection effect performed using the touch input unit 331a will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is an explanatory diagram showing a notification BGM selection effect using the touch input unit 331a.

In the present embodiment, three notification effects are provided to notify the lottery result of the ART lottery process in the BB during the BB. The period during BB, that is, the period from the start to the end of BB shows a specific example of the special period according to the present invention. The special period according to the present invention may be any game that spans a plurality of games, and may be, for example, during the above-mentioned CZ (the period from the start to the end of the CZ).

In the present embodiment, as three notification effects, a chance notification effect, a complete notification effect, and a post-announcement effect are provided. The chance notification effect is an effect of displaying an image suggesting that the player has won the ART on the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11, and there is a chance by lottery when the ART is won and when the ART is not won. It is performed when the announcement production is decided.

As the chance notification effect, the above-mentioned "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)" (see FIG. 104) is adopted. The case where the chance notification effect is determined by the lottery is the case where the "Gase reverse push winning" is determined by the above-mentioned Gase reverse push lottery (see S569).

The complete notification effect is an effect of displaying an image deterministically notifying that the ART has been won on the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11, and is performed only when the ART is won. The post-announcement effect is performed in the final game of the BB. The subsequent notification effect is an effect of displaying an image notifying whether or not the ART has been won during the BB on the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11. After this, in the BB when the notification effect is selected, the above-mentioned state suggestion touch effect may be performed.

In addition, it is a specific example when the specific condition according to the present invention is satisfied in the case of winning the ART, determining the chance notification effect by the lottery, and the final game of the BB. In addition, when the specific conditions according to the present invention are satisfied, it can be set arbitrarily. For example, when a predetermined number of games are exhausted, or when one or a plurality of predetermined internal winning combinations for notification determination are won. If you do, you can mention.

Further, in the present embodiment, three BGMs (Background Music) that can be output in the BB, that is, BGM1, BGM2, and BGM3 are provided. BGMs 1 to 3 show a specific example of sound production according to the present invention. Further, each BGM is associated with an image. Therefore, during BB, an image corresponding to the selected BGM type is displayed on the display unit 11a.

In the present embodiment, the announcement BGM selection effect is performed before starting the BB. In the notification BGM selection effect, as shown in FIG. 150, the notification BGM selection screen is displayed on the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11. On the notification BGM selection screen, a notification effect selection image 361, a BGM selection image 362, a demo image 363, and a START image 364 are displayed. The BGM selection image 362 shows a specific example of the sound production selection image according to the present invention.

In the notification effect selection image 361, the chance notification selection area 361a in which the characters "chance notification" is displayed, the complete notification selection area 361b in which the characters "complete notification" are displayed, and the characters "post-notification" are displayed. It has a post-notification selection area 361c. Of the selected areas 361a to 361c, the color of the most recently tapped (or long-tapped) selected area changes. As a result, the player can recognize the currently selected selected area.

The BGM selection image 362 is provided with a BGM1 selection area 362a provided with the letters and numbers "BGM1", a BGM2 selection area 362b provided with the letters and numbers "BGM2", and the letters and numbers "BGM3". It has a BGM3 selection area 361c. Of the selection areas 362a to 362c, the color of the most recently tapped selection area changes. As a result, the player can recognize the currently selected selected area.

In the demo video 363, a video corresponding to the selected BGM type is displayed. The video corresponding to the type of BGM is displayed on the entire display unit 11a when BB is started. The START image 364 corresponds to the enter button. By tapping the START image 364 after selecting the type of notification effect and the type of BGM, the combination of the type of notification effect and the type of BGM is determined.

In the notification BGM selection effect, when the player taps the chance notification selection area 361a of the notification effect selection image 361, the color of the chance notification selection area 361a changes and the chance notification effect is selected. Next, when the player taps the BGM1 selection area 362a of the BGM selection image 362, the color of the BGM1 selection area 362a changes and the BGM1 is selected. Then, when the player taps the START image 364, the combination of the chance notification effect and the BGM1 is determined as the effect performed during the BB.

When the BB in which the combination of the chance notification effect and the BGM1 is determined is started, the speakers 20L and 20R usually output the BGM1, and the display unit 11a displays an image corresponding to the BGM1. Then, when it is decided to perform the chance notification effect, the display unit 11a interrupts the display of the image corresponding to the BGM1 and displays the image according to the chance notification effect (“reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)”. ) Is displayed.

Further, when it is decided to perform the complete notification effect (ART wins) in the BB in which the complete notification effect is selected as the type of the notification effect, the display unit 11a displays an image according to the type of the selected BGM. Is interrupted and the image corresponding to the complete notification effect is displayed. The video corresponding to this complete notification effect may be the same as the image according to the chance notification effect (“reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)”).

Further, in the BB in which the post-notification effect is selected as the type of the notification effect, the speakers 20L and 20R output the selected BGM, and the display unit 11a displays the image corresponding to the type of the selected BGM. Then, the display unit 11a displays an image corresponding to the post-notification effect in the final game of BB. After this, in the video corresponding to the announcement production, it is announced during the BB whether or not the ART has been won.

As described above, in the notification BGM selection effect, the type of the notification effect and the type of the BGM (sound effect) can be selected respectively. As a result, it becomes possible to play a game during BB (specific period) by combining a desired type of notification effect and a desired type of BGM, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the conventional game machine, BGM (sound production) corresponding to the type of notification production has been determined. Therefore, when the favorite notification effect is selected, it may not be possible to output the favorite BGM. However, in the notification BGM selection effect of the present embodiment, the favorite notification effect and the favorite BGM can be combined.

Further, in the notification BGM selection effect, by always selecting a predetermined notification effect in a plurality of BBs and changing the type of BGM, the output BGM can be enjoyed regardless of the notification method (game nature). .. On the contrary, in a plurality of BBs, by always selecting a predetermined BGM and changing the type of the notification effect, the method of notification (game quality) can be enjoyed regardless of the output BGM (music). Can be done.

Further, in the notification BGM selection effect, the notification effect selection image 361 and the BGM selection image 362 are displayed at the same time on the notification BGM selection screen. Then, the type of notification effect and the type of BGM (sound effect) can be selected by operating the touch input unit 331a. As a result, the selection operation of the effect can be easily performed, and the player can easily grasp the selected plurality of items.

As described above, during BB, the image displayed on the display unit 11a is determined according to the type of the selected BGM, but the image displayed on the display unit 11a according to the type of the selected notification effect. May be decided. When the video is determined according to the type of the notification effect, the display content of the demo video 363 is determined by the type of the notification effect selected at that time. When the image is determined according to the type of BGM, the sense of unity between the BGM and the image is enhanced, and the interest of the production is enhanced. In addition, when the video is determined according to the type of the notification effect, displaying the image related to the notification effect has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the notification effect.

FIGS. 151 and 152 are explanatory views showing a modified example of the notification BGM selection effect using the touch input unit 331a.

In the modified example of the notification BGM selection effect, the screen switching mark 365 is displayed on the notification BGM selection screen when a special condition is satisfied (see FIG. 151). In addition, as a special condition, it can be set arbitrarily. For example, if a certain period of time has passed since the game machine was introduced, or if Unimemo has been started, a predetermined number of bonuses have been won. Cases can be mentioned.

When the player taps the screen switching mark 365, the notification BGM selection screen is switched. The switched notification BGM selection screen is hereinafter referred to as a "second notification BGM selection screen". As shown in FIG. 152, on the second notification BGM selection screen, a notification effect selection image 361, a BGM selection image 366, a demo video 363, a START image 364, a random START image 367, and a screen switching mark 368 are displayed. It is displayed. The BGM selection image 366 shows a specific example of the sound production selection image according to the present invention.

The BGM selection image 366 is provided with a BGM4 selection area 366a provided with the letters and numbers "BGM4", a BGM5 selection area 366b provided with the letters and numbers "BGM5", and a symbol "???". It has a non-selected region 366c. That is, when the special conditions are satisfied, the types of BGM that can be selected increase.

Of the selection areas 366a and 366b, the color of the most recently tapped selection area changes. As a result, the player can recognize the currently selected selected area. The non-selected area 366c is not selected even if the tap operation is performed. The non-selected area 366c will be changed to an area where the type of BGM can be selected when further conditions are satisfied in the future.

The random START image 367 is operated when the type of notification effect and the type of BGM are randomly selected and determined. That is, it is used when the player does not select the type of notification effect and the type of BGM. The screen switching mark 368 is used when switching the second notification BGM selection screen (see 152) to the notification BGM selection screen (see FIG. 151).

In this modification, screen switching marks 365 and 368 are provided on the notification BGM selection screen and the second notification BGM selection screen. However, switching between the notification BGM selection screen and the second notification BGM selection screen according to the present invention may be performed by a flick operation.

In the present embodiment, chance notification effect, complete notification effect, and post-announcement effect are provided as the types of notification effect. However, the notification effect according to the present invention can be arbitrarily set. In addition, the number of notification effects may be two or more. Further, in the present embodiment, BGM1, BGM2, and BGM3 are provided as the types of BGM (sound production). However, the sound effect according to the present invention is not limited to BGM, and may be, for example, an effect of outputting dialogue.

In the present embodiment, the type of notification effect and the type of BGM are selected on the same screen, but the type is not limited to the notification effect, and the type of effect type and the type of BGM (sound effect) are selected. May be good. For example, as the type of production type, "HIGH", which has a high production frequency and frequent low-expectation production, "MIDDLE", which has a medium production frequency and a standard balance of production, and a production with a low production frequency When it occurs, "LOW", which raises the expectation of winning such as a bonus, can be mentioned. As described above, the type of effect type may be set based on the effect frequency.

Further, the type of effect type (effect mode) may be the following six types (first to sixth effect modes). The first production mode is mainly a one-game complete production. In the second production mode, the chance combination that is missed is completely notified, and the frequency of pressing the player is reduced by the production rule that no production occurs except for the chance combination. In the third production mode, the role of chance will surely develop into a continuous production, but there is a rule in the correspondence between the role and the destination, and if the rule is broken, the expectation of winning a bonus or the like will increase.

In the fourth effect mode, the first effect mode is randomly shifted to the third effect mode as a so-called stage, and a unique stage with a high expectation of winning such as a bonus is provided. In the fifth production mode, when the chance combination is established, the production is performed to quantify the winning expectation such as a bonus. In the sixth effect mode, the display unit 11a does not perform any suggestion effect, and notifies the bonus winning or the like only by the decorative lamp of the front door or the notification sound.

In addition, instead of the BGM type selection, the character type selection may be used. By selecting a character, the voice such as push order navigation during AT becomes that character's, BGM becomes the theme song of the character, and the character appears or is related to the background during normal times or bonuses. The image to be played will be played. In this case, the appearance of the overall production specifications including not only the BGM and audio but also the video is selected based on the character, and the image of the work related to the character can be strongly impressed on the player.

Here, when the selectable items are arranged, the present invention presents the first selection for selecting the type of effect type for information related to the acquisition of game value such as notification and suggestion effect, and for games such as BGM and characters. It can be said that the second selection for selecting the effect type for information not related to the acquisition of value is selected on the same screen. This makes it easier for the player to grasp various production variations and makes it easier to select the production, which makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the type of notification effect may be selected as the first selection, and the type of video may be selected as the second selection on the same screen. The BGM in this case may not be particularly changed depending on the selected item, and may be determined based on the type of notification effect or the type of video. As a further modification, the selection of the two items may be an effect type for information that is not related to the acquisition of the game value.

Further, the first selection item can be selected as the BGM type and the second selection item can be selected as the video type on the same screen. In this case, the effect type for the information related to the addition of the game value may not be particularly changed depending on the selected item, and may be determined based on the type of BGM or the type of video. Good.

Up to this point, the case where two selection items are used has been described, but if it is possible to smoothly determine the types of a plurality of effects by determining a plurality of effects at the same timing, the number of selection items Is not limited to two. For example, the types related to the three items of "notification effect", "BGM", and "video" may be selectable, or more selection items may be selectable on the same screen.

In this embodiment, the image related to the notification BGM selection effect is displayed on the entire surface of the display unit 11a. However, the image related to the selection effect according to the present invention is displayed on a part of the display unit 11a, and the effect (video) according to the game state is displayed on the other part of the display unit 11a so that the player can play the game. It may be possible to select the production while enjoying the production according to the state. In this case, when the selection of the effect is completed, the effect display is changed as appropriate. Further, in a game machine equipped with a plurality of display devices such as a so-called sub liquid crystal screen, an image related to the selection effect is displayed on an arbitrary display device, and an effect (video) according to the game state is displayed on another display device. May be good.

It should be noted that the volume adjustment, the brightness adjustment of the decorative lamp of the housing, the brightness adjustment of the display, and the like may be set according to the selection. In this way, by collectively setting the game environment desired by the player, a comfortable game can be performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the touch input unit 331a accepts the selection operation because the intuitive operation is possible, but the start lever 16 is used to input the direction up / down / left / right, the effect button 322 and the MAX bet button 14. The selection operation may be accepted by other operation means such as.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect in the BB and the type of BGM are selected before starting the BB, but the effect and the type of BGM can be selected at a predetermined timing in the normal time, or the player can select the type of the BGM. It may be possible to select on a menu screen that can be displayed at an arbitrary timing (except during continuous production). In this case, the specific period in which the selected production status is reflected may be from the selection to the predetermined number of games or the winning of the next bonus or the like.

The announcement BGM selection effect of the present embodiment may be used for selecting the number of rounds announcement effect during the jackpot of the pachinko game machine. In this case, the notification selection effect is performed during the waiting state for passing through the winning combination gate, which is one of the jackpot start conditions, the jackpot start interval, and the first round to the predetermined round of the jackpot start. The content of the announcement here is "complete announcement" that immediately announces the number of rounds of the jackpot, and "post-announcement" that announces the end or continuation of the jackpot at the end of the announced round or at the interval between rounds. Depending on whether the production succeeds or fails in each round, it can be used as a "chance announcement" that makes it appear as if the number of remaining rounds has increased, like adding pachislot.

In addition, in the hold look-ahead during the big hit, it may be possible to select the notification effect of whether or not to hold the so-called hold sequence, or to select the notification effect of whether or not to enter an advantageous gaming state such as a probability change, a short time, or a frequent small hit after the big hit. .. Further, the notification BGM selection effect may be performed during the big hit or during the interval of the end of the big hit, and the effect mode and the BGM during the probability change or the time reduction may be selectable.

In addition, in the case of a specification in which the selection pattern of the fluctuation time changes with the fluctuation of the predetermined number of times after the big hit during the time reduction or the probability change, the fluctuation time of the predetermined number of times is set as a long time value, and the notification BGM selection is performed based on the fluctuation. You may let me do it. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game by giving a new stimulus to the player who is in an advantageous gaming state but whose interest is declining due to difficulty in winning.

In addition, not only at the time of big hit, but also at the time of small hit or at a predetermined time during normal time (for example, at the time of stage change), the production type and BGM may be selected at the same time by the notification BGM selection effect, and while waiting for customers (waiting). Even if it is performed on the menu screen that can be displayed by operating the effect button or the like, there is an effect of suppressing the deterioration of the interest of the game.

(5) Expansion effect Next, the expansion effect performed by using the touch input unit 331a will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 159. FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram showing an expansion effect using the touch input unit 331a.

In the present embodiment, when the number of additional games for ART is determined in the additional lottery process during ART (see S583 in FIG. 105), the expansion effect using the touch input unit 31a is executed to determine the additional game. Notify the number.

When the number of additional games for ART is determined in the additional lottery process, the expansion target image 371 is displayed on the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 as shown in FIG. 153. The expansion target image 371 is displayed in the center of the display unit 11a and is formed in a quadrangle.

In this embodiment, the screen resolution of the display unit 11a is set to 1280 × 720 pixels. Therefore, the upper left corner of the display unit 11a is the coordinate (0,0), and the lower right corner is the coordinate (1280,720). The center of the expansion target image 371 coincides with the coordinates (650, 305) of the display unit 11a, and the width is set to 400 pixels and the height is set to 450 pixels.

In the expansion effect, the expansion target image 371 is expanded by performing a drag operation (swipe operation) on the touch input unit 331a. Then, the expansion target image 371 has a different expansion rate depending on the value of the number of additional games of ART. That is, the larger the value of the number of additional games of ART, the more the expansion target image 371 expands.

FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram showing an input determination region for expansion effect using the touch input unit 331a. Input determination areas 373 and 374 for expanding the expansion target image 371 are set at both left and right ends of the expansion target image 371. The input determination area 373 is set in a range of 50 pixels to the left and right of the left end of the expansion target image 371. Further, the input determination area 374 is set in a range of 50 pixels to the left and right of the expansion target image 371 with the right end thereof interposed therebetween. Therefore, the widths of the input determination areas 373 and 374 are set to 100 pixels, respectively.

FIG. 155 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the expansion target image 371 is expanded. As shown in FIG. 155, in the present embodiment, the expansion target image 371 is expanded (expanded) in the lateral direction by performing a drag operation with a finger in contact with one or both of the input determination areas 373 and 374.

When the player touches the input determination area 373 with his / her finger and drags the image to the left, the expansion target image 371 expands to the left. At this time, the right end of the expansion target image 371 does not move, the width of the expansion target image 371 increases, and the center of the expansion target image 371 is displaced to the left. Further, the input determination area 373 moves together with the left end of the expansion target image 371. Even if the player touches the input determination area 373 with his / her finger and drags the image to the right, the size of the expansion target image 371 does not change.

On the other hand, when the player touches the input determination area 374 with a finger and performs a drag operation to the right, the expansion target image 371 expands so as to expand to the right. At this time, the left end of the expansion target image 371 does not move, the width of the expansion target image 371 increases, and the center of the expansion target image 371 is displaced to the right. Further, the input determination area 374 moves together with the right end of the expansion target image 371. Even if the player touches the input determination area 374 with a finger and drags the image to the left, the size of the expansion target image 371 does not change.

When the player touches the input judgment areas 373 and 374 with their fingers and drags them to the left with the finger touching the input judgment area 373 and to the right with the finger touching the input judgment area 374, The expansion target image 371 expands so as to expand in the left-right direction. At this time, the width of the expansion target image 371 increases, and the center of the expansion target image 371 is displaced in the long direction of the drag operation. When the drag operation has the same length, the center of the expansion target image 371 is not displaced.

FIG. 156 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the expansion target image 371 is expanded to the left side to the limit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which expanded the expansion target image 371 to the right side at the limit.
In the present embodiment, the limit positions at both ends of the expansion target image 371 when the expansion target image 371 is expanded are set.

As shown in FIG. 156, the limit position of the left end of the expansion target image 371 when the expansion target image 371 is expanded to the left is set to the coordinates (y = 80 to 530). When the expansion target image 371 is expanded to the limit only on the left side, the center of the expansion target image 371 coincides with the coordinates (475,305).

As shown in FIG. 157, the limit position of the right end of the expansion target image 371 when the expansion target image 371 is expanded to the right is set to the coordinates (1200, y) (y = 80 to 530). When the expansion target image 371 is expanded to the limit only on the right side, the center of the expansion target image 371 coincides with the coordinates (825, 305).

When the expansion target image 371 expands to a size corresponding to the value of the number of additional games of ART, the value of the number of additional games is displayed superimposed on the expansion target image 371. When the value of the number of additional games is not displayed superimposed on the expansion target image 371, the expansion target image 371 can be further expanded.

After the expansion target image 371 expands to the left to the limit, when the expansion target image 371 is further expanded, a finger is brought into contact with the input determination area 374 and a drag operation is performed to the right. Further, when the expansion target image 371 expands to the right to the limit and then the expansion target image 371 is further expanded, a finger is brought into contact with the input determination area 373 and a drag operation is performed to the left. As a result, the expansion target image 371 can be further expanded.

FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 and the number of additional games of ART. FIG. 159 is a graph showing the relationship between the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 and the number of additional games of ART.

As described above, the expansion target image 371 has a different expansion rate depending on the value of the number of additional games of ART. As shown in FIGS. 158 and 159, in the present embodiment, the number of additional games for ART is set to no additional games (0G (game)), 5G, 10G, 20G, 30G, 50G, 70G, 100G, and 200G. There is. On the other hand, the width (region) in which the expansion target image 371 can be expanded is divided into a first section to an eighth section.

In the case of no addition (0G (game)), the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 50 pixels. Therefore, in the case of no addition (0G (game)), the expansion target image 371 does not expand.

The width of the first section is set to 50 pixels, and when the expansion target image 371 expands to the boundary between the first section and the second section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 becomes 50 pixels. When the number of additional games of ART is 5G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 50 pixels.

The width of the second section is set to 50 pixels, and when the expansion target image 371 expands to the boundary between the second section and the third section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 becomes 100 pixels. When the number of additional games of ART is 10G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 100 pixels.

The width of the third section is set to 100 pixels, and when the expansion target image 371 expands to the boundary between the third section and the fourth section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 becomes 200 pixels. When the number of additional games of ART is 20G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 200 pixels.

The width of the fourth section is set to 100 pixels, and when the expansion target image 371 expands to the boundary between the fourth section and the fifth section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 becomes 300 pixels. When the number of additional games of ART is 30 G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 300 pixels.

The width of the fifth section is set to 100 pixels, and when the expansion target image 371 expands to the boundary between the fifth section and the sixth section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 becomes 400 pixels. When the number of additional games of ART is 50G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 400 pixels.

The width of the sixth section is set to 100 pixels, and when the expansion target image 371 expands to the boundary between the sixth section and the seventh section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 becomes 500 pixels. When the number of additional games of ART is 70 G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 500 pixels.

The width of the seventh section is set to 100 pixels, and when the expansion target image 371 expands to the boundary between the seventh section and the eighth section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 becomes 600 pixels. When the number of additional games of ART is 100 G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 600 pixels.

The width of the eighth section is set to 100 pixels, and when the expansion target image 371 expands to the maximum of the eighth section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 becomes 700 pixels. When the number of additional games of ART is 200 G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 700 pixels.

When the expansion target image 371 expands to the determined expansion width, the determined number of ART additional games is displayed superimposed on the expansion target image 371. However, as the expansion appearance according to the present invention, a display in which the number of additional games of ART is counted up according to the expansion of the expansion target image 371 may be displayed superimposed on the expansion target image 371.

In this way, the rate of increase in the number of additional games of ART with respect to the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 in each section is set separately. In other words, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 required to increase the number of additional games of ART by 1G differs between the first section to the eighth section.

In the first to fourth sections, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 required to increase the number of additional games by 1G is 10 pixels. Further, in the fifth section and the sixth section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 required to increase the number of additional games by 1G is 5 pixels. Further, in the seventh section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 required to increase the number of additional games by 1G is 10/3 pixels. Then, in the seventh section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 required to increase the number of additional games by 1G becomes 1 pixel.

As a result, as the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 increases, the rate of increase in the number of additional fields of ART increases. As a result, even if the number of additional booms is small, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 can be appropriately secured, and the playability of expanding the expansion target image 371 can be enjoyed.

In the expansion effect, the expansion width (expansion rate) of the expansion target image 371 differs depending on the value of the number of additional games of ART (the size of the privilege). Therefore, the value of the number of additional games of ART is set to the expansion target image 371. Can be expressed visually. As a result, the visual effect of the notification effect using the display unit 11a can be enhanced, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the privilege given to the player who is notified in the expansion effect is the number of additional games of ART. However, the privilege given to the player who is notified in the expansion effect is not limited to the number of additional games of ART, and for example, the winning, transition, and predetermined of each game state (BB, RB, CZ, ART). It may be the number of game media paid out or obtained during the period of.

When notifying the winning or transition of each game state (BB, RB, CZ, ART), the expansion width (expansion rate) of the expansion target image is made different according to the type of the privilege to be notified. In this case, the expansion width (expansion rate) may be increased in the order of preference for the player.

In the present embodiment, when the expansion target image 371 is displayed on the display unit 11a, the expansion appearance is executed even if the effect button 322 (see FIG. 135) is pressed. Is notified. Examples of this notification include voice output from the speakers 20L and 20R, characters displayed on the display unit 11a, and the like.

In the expansion effect, when the player presses the effect button 322, the expansion target image 371 expands in both the left and right directions unless the determined number of additional ART games is added (0G (game)). Inflate to. That is, when the effect button 322 is pressed, the same operation as when the finger touching the input judgment area 373 is dragged to the left and the finger touching the input judgment area 374 is dragged to the right is performed. become. If the touch input unit 331a and the effect button 322 are operated at that time, the operation of the effect button 322 has priority.

As a result, the player can enjoy the effect using the touch sensor module without operating the touch input unit 331a. In order to simultaneously inflate the image to be expanded 371 in the left-right direction, it is necessary to operate with both hands. However, since the effect button 322 (see FIG. 135) can be pressed and held with one hand, the expansion effect can be quickly advanced even when one hand is occupied.

In the expansion effect of the present embodiment, the expansion target image 371 is expanded according to the operation performed by the player. However, as the expansion effect according to the present invention, the expansion target image is expanded for a predetermined period without requiring the operation of the player, and the size or type of the privilege given to the player is notified. It may be a thing.

Even in this case, the expansion rate of the expansion target image is different depending on the size or type of the privilege given to the player. Thereby, the size or type of the privilege given to the player can be visually expressed. As a result, the visual effect of the notification effect using the display unit can be enhanced, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

Further, in the expansion effect of the present embodiment, the expansion target image 371 is expanded in the left-right direction by bringing a finger into contact with the input determination areas 373 and 374 and performing a drag operation in the left-right direction. However, as the expansion effect according to the present invention, the image to be expanded may be expanded in the vertical direction by performing a drag operation in the vertical direction. Further, as the expansion effect according to the present invention, the expansion target image may be expanded in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction by performing an oblique drag operation.

Further, in the expansion effect of the present embodiment, the number of additional games of ART to be notified is set for each section. However, as the expansion effect according to the present invention, a plurality of additional games of ART to be notified may be set for each section. For example, when the expansion target image expands within the first section, any one of 1 to 5G may be notified as the number of additional games of ART.

Also in this case, the expansion coefficient is made different according to the value of the number of additional games of ART. That is, when the number of additional games of ART is 1G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 10 pixels, and when the number of additional games of ART is 2G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is 20 pixels. Will be decided. Further, when the number of additional games of ART is 3G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 30 pixels, and when the number of additional games of ART is 4G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is 40 pixels. Will be decided. Then, when the number of additional games of ART is 5G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 50 pixels.

Further, in the expansion effect of the present embodiment, when the effect button 322 is pressed in the expansion appearance, the expansion target image 371 expands in both the left and right directions. However, as the expansion effect according to the present invention, the effect button 322 may be kept pressed until the expansion of the expansion target image 371 is completed.

(6) Scratch effect Next, a scratch effect performed by using the touch input unit 331a will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 to 166. FIG. 160 is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility reduction efficiency centered on the touch coordinates related to the scratch effect using the touch input unit 331a.

In the present embodiment, in the CZ lottery (see FIG. 50), whether or not the winning of the CZ (CZ1 and CZ2) is determined is notified by a scratch effect using the touch input unit 31a. In the scratch effect, the shield image 381 is displayed on the display unit 11a. The color of the shielded image 381 can be set as appropriate, but it can be set to, for example, silver. As a result, the shielded image 381 can be made to look like a silver scratch print used for a lottery or the like.

When the player rubs the area where the shielded image 381 is displayed with a finger (drag operation is performed), the portion rubbed with the finger of the shielded image 381 becomes a visibility reduced mode (disappears). Then, the display is performed so that a part of the image such as characters, numbers, figures, and patterns can be seen from the portion in which the visibility is lowered. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect as if the silver scratch used for a lottery or the like is being scraped, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect.

The area 382 that can be changed to the visibility reduction mode by touching the player's finger (hereinafter referred to as “visual reduction possible area”) 382 is set to a circle having a predetermined radius centered on the detected touch coordinates. ing. The visibility-reducable region 382 has a first region 382a, a second region 382b, and a third region 382c.

As shown in FIG. 160, the first region 382a is formed in a circle including touch coordinates. The second region 382b is formed in a ring shape surrounding the first region 382a, and is farther from the touch coordinates than the first region 382a. The third region is formed in a ring shape surrounding the second region 382b, and is farther from the touch coordinates than the second region 382b.

The first region 382a has a higher efficiency of reducing the visibility of the shielded image 381 (hereinafter, referred to as “visibility reduction efficiency”) than the second region 382b. Further, the second region 382b has a higher efficiency of reducing the visibility of the shielded image 381 than the third region 382c. That is, the closer to the touch coordinates, the easier it is to change the shielded image 381 to the mode of reducing visibility. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the reality of the effect of scraping the scratch, and to improve the interest of the scratch effect.

In the first region 382a according to the present embodiment, the alpha value is subtracted by 64. Further, the second region 382b subtracts 48 from the alpha value, and the third region 382c subtracts 32 from the alpha value. The alpha value is a numerical value representing transparency and is set to 0 to 255. When the alpha value is 255, it is opaque, and as the alpha value decreases, the transparency increases, and when the alpha value is 0, it becomes completely transparent.

In the present embodiment, in the scratch effect, the visibility-reducing region 382 is changed to the visibility-reducing region 383 by performing the pinch-out operation in the region other than the region where the shielding image 381 is displayed.

FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing a change in visibility reduction efficiency related to a scratch effect.
As shown in FIG. 161, the visibility-reducing region 383 is formed in a circle having the same area as the visibility-reducing region 382, and has a first region 383a, a second region 383b, and a third region 383c. There is.

The area of the first region 383a is larger than that of the first region 382a of the visibility-reducing region 382. The area of the second region 383b is smaller than the second region 382b of the visibility-reducing region 382, and the area of the third region 383c is smaller than the third region 382c of the visibility-reducing region 382. Therefore, the visibility-reducing region 383 has a larger area of the region having the highest visibility-reducing efficiency (first region 383a) than the visibility-reducing region 382, and is easily changed to the visibility-reducing mode.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control board 77 (see FIG. 7) controls the liquid crystal display device 11 to change the visibility-reducing region 382 into the visibility-reducing region 383. That is, the sub-control board 77 shows a specific example of the touch mode management means according to the present invention.

By managing the touch mode, the sub-control board 77 changes the visibility-reducing region 382 into the visibility-reducing region 383. Specifically, the sub-control board 77 is set in the visibility-reducing region 382 when the touch mode is the first touch mode. On the other hand, when the touch mode is the second touch mode, it is set to the visibility reduction possible area 383.

When the scratch effect is started, the sub-control board 77 sets the touch mode to the first touch mode. Then, a region that can be changed to the visibility reduction mode by touching the player's finger is set in the visibility reduction possible region 382. On the other hand, if the pinch-out operation is performed in a region other than the region where the shield image 381 is displayed during the scratch effect, the sub-control board 77 sets the touch mode to the second touch mode. Then, a region that can be changed to the visibility reduction mode by touching the player's finger is set in the visibility reduction possible region 383.

In the present embodiment, when the pinch-in operation is performed in the area other than the area where the shield image 381 is displayed during the scratch effect, the sub-control board 77 sets the touch mode to the first touch mode. Then, a region that can be changed to the visibility reduction mode by touching the player's finger is set in the visibility reduction possible region 382.

As described above, in the scratch effect, the visibility reduction possible area 382 and the visibility reduction possible area 383 are switched by performing the pinch-out operation and the pinch-out operation. Thereby, the visibility reduction efficiency can be changed. That is, the visibility reduction efficiency can be increased by setting the visibility reduction possible area 383, and the shielding image 381 can be easily changed to the visibility reduction mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest during the scratch production.

In the present embodiment, the visibility-reducing region 382 is changed to the visibility-reducing region 383 by performing the pinch-out operation. This pinch-out operation shows a specific example of the special operation according to the present invention, and the special operation according to the present invention includes, for example, another operation for the touch input unit 331a, an effect button 322, or the like. The operation for the operation means other than the touch input unit of the above may be adopted.

162 to 166 are explanatory views showing the flow of scratch effect.
In the present embodiment, when a special condition is satisfied, a scratch effect for notifying whether or not the winning of CZ (CZ1 and CZ2) is determined is executed. Examples of cases where the special conditions are satisfied include the case where the winning of CZ is decided, or the case where the winning of CZ is not decided and it is decided to execute the scratch effect by lottery. be able to.

When the scratch effect is started, four shielded images 381a to 381d are displayed on the display unit 11a (see FIG. 162). In addition, a notification prompting the user to rub (drag operation) the four shielded images 381a to 381d with a finger is performed. Examples of this notification include voice output from the speakers 20L and 20R, characters displayed on the display unit 11a, and the like.

When the four shielded images 381a to 381d are set (erased) in a visibility-reducing mode, "this" or "x" becomes visible. “This” or “x” indicates a specific example of a predetermined effect image according to the present invention. “Win” indicates that the CZ has been won, and “x” indicates that the CZ has not been won.

When the CZ is won, basically, the "win" is arranged in any of the regions corresponding to the four shielded images 381a to 381d (FIG. 163). Therefore, the player recognizes that the "win" is visible and the CZ is won by setting at least one of the areas in which the four shielded images 381a to 381d are displayed in the visibility-reduced mode. can do. Even if all of the four shielded images 381a to 381d are not set to the reduced visibility mode, the scratch effect ends when the "hit" becomes visible.

On the other hand, when the CZ is not won, "x" is arranged in any of the regions corresponding to the four shielded images 381a to 381d (FIG. 164). Therefore, the player recognizes that the four "x" s are visible and does not win the CZ by setting all of the areas where the four shielded images 381a to 381d are displayed in the visibility reduced mode. can do. When the four "x" s become visible, the scratch effect is basically finished.

In the present embodiment, "x" may be arranged in any of the regions corresponding to the four shielded images 381a to 381d even if the CZ is won. This is determined, for example, when the reverse pattern is drawn when the CZ is won and the reverse pattern is won. Further, the normal CZ winning and the CZ winning of the reversal pattern may be defined as the type of the CZ winning, and the presence or absence of the reversing pattern and the CZ winning may be determined together in the CZ lottery.

In the case of the CZ winning of the reverse pattern, if all the areas in which the four shielded images 381a to 381d are displayed are set to the reduced visibility mode, the image of the point displayed in the center of the display unit 11a (four shielded images 381a). A notification prompting the pinch-out operation to be performed on (a part of the display partitioning the ~ 381d) is performed (see FIG. 165).

The notification prompting the pinch-out operation on the image of the point displayed in the center of the display unit 11a is performed in advance after all the areas in which the four shielded images 381a to 381d are displayed are set to the reduced visibility mode. It is executed after the specified period has passed. However, the notification prompting the pinch-out operation in the scratch effect can be appropriately set at the execution timing, and may be executed on condition that the effect button 322 is pressed, for example.

When the player performs a pinch-out operation on the image of the point displayed in the center of the display unit 11a, the image of the point is enlarged and displayed, and the transparency is increased. As a result, the "hit" provided in the area corresponding to the image of the point becomes visible (see FIG. 166). As a result, the player can recognize that he has won the CZ. When the "hit" becomes visible, the scratch effect ends.

In the case of the CZ winning of the reverse pattern, it is possible to perform a pinch-out operation on the point image when the four shielded images 381a to 381d are displayed. Therefore, when the four shielded images 381a to 381d are displayed, the point image can be enlarged and displayed by the pinch-out operation without rubbing the four shielded images 381a to 381d with a finger (without dragging). Can be done.

In the scratch effect in the case of the CZ winning of the reverse pattern, since the pinch-out operation is combined, an unexpected effect can be realized and the interest of the game can be improved.

167 and 168 are explanatory views showing a modified example of the scratch effect.
In the modified example of the scratch effect, the effect when the CZ winning of the reverse pattern is determined is different.

In the modified example of the scratch effect, in the case of the CZ winning of the reverse pattern, when all the areas in which the four shielded images 381a to 381d are displayed are set to the visibility reduction mode, the point displayed in the center of the display unit 11a. Notification is performed to prompt the image (a part of the display partitioning the four shielded images 381a to 381d) to perform the pinch-out operation (see FIG. 165).

When the player performs a pinch-out operation on the image of the point displayed in the center of the display unit 11a, the image of the point is enlarged and displayed, and the shield image 381e becomes visible (see FIG. 167). Then, when the player rubs the shielded image 381e with a finger (drag operation is performed), the area where the shielded image 381e is displayed becomes a visibility-reduced mode, and the "hit" becomes visible (see FIG. 166). As a result, the player can recognize that he / she has won the CZ. When the "hit" becomes visible, the scratch effect ends.

In the present embodiment, when a special condition is satisfied, a scratch effect for notifying whether or not the winning of CZ (CZ1 and CZ2) is determined is executed. Then, whether or not the winning of the CZ was decided was notified by the image of "winning" or "x". However, the scratch effect according to the present invention is not limited to notifying whether or not the winning of the CZ has been decided, and for example, the winning of the internal winning combination that is advantageous to the player and the winning of the ART have been determined. That, the number of additional games of ART, etc. may be notified.

Then, various images can be adopted as the effect image to be visible when the shielded image is set to the reduced visibility mode, depending on the content to be notified. For example, when the content to be notified is the number of additional games of ART, the numerical value representing the determined number of additional games is used as the effect image.

(7) Additional notification effect Next, the additional notification effect performed using the display unit 11a will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing an additional notification effect using the display unit 11a.

In the present embodiment, when the number of additional games for ART is determined in the additional lottery process during ART (see S583 in FIG. 105), the additional notification effect using the display unit 11a is executed to determine the additional game. Notify the number.

In the additional notification effect, first, the determined "number of additional ART games" and "number of remaining ART games" are displayed on the display unit 11a. After that, the "remaining number of ART games after the addition" is displayed by adding the "number of additional ART games" to the "number of remaining ART games". At this time, a count-up display is performed in which the numerical value of the "remaining ART games" is increased from the "remaining ART games" to the "remaining ART games after the addition".

The “number of additional games of ART” is “+1700” shown in FIG. 169, and shows a specific example of the first value according to the present invention. The “remaining number of ART games” is the “remaining 10G” shown in FIG. 169, and shows a specific example of the second value according to the present invention. The "remaining number of ART games after addition" is "remaining 1710G" shown in FIG. 169, and shows a specific example of the total value according to the present invention.

In the count-up display, when "the number of remaining ART games" is x and "the number of additional games of the remaining ART" is y, the "number of remaining ART games"x'after one frame is calculated by the formula 5. To do. The numbers after the decimal point are rounded down. Further, in the present embodiment, an image of 30 frames per second is displayed.
x'= x + (y / 100) ... (Equation 5)

Further, the "number of additional games of the remaining ART"y'after one frame is calculated by the equation 6. The numbers after the decimal point are rounded down.
y'= y- (y / 100) ... (Equation 6)

For example, when the "number of remaining ART games" is 10, and the "number of additional games of ART" is determined to be 1700, the "number of remaining ART games"x'in the first frame is 27.
x'= 10+ (1700/100)
= 27

In addition, the "number of additional games of ART remaining"y'in the first frame is 1683.
y'= 1700- (1700/100)
= 1683

The "remaining number of ART games"x'in the second frame is 43.
x'= 27+ (1683/100)
= 43

In addition, the "number of additional games of the remaining ART"y'in the second frame is 1683.
y'= 1683- (1683/100)
= 1667

The "remaining number of ART games"x'in the third frame is 59.
x'= 43+ (1667/100)
= 59

In addition, the "number of additional games of the remaining ART"y'in the third frame is 1683.
y'= 1667- (1667/100)
= 1651

When the "number of additional games of ART remaining" y is 1600 or more and less than 1700, the fluctuation value added to the "number of remaining ART games" x in one frame is "16" (variation value). = Y / 100). That is, the "remaining number of ART games" x'increases by "16" for each frame. When the "number of additional games of ART remaining" y is 100 or more and less than 200, the fluctuation value added to the "number of remaining ART games" x in one frame is "1".

Further, when the "number of additional games of ART remaining" y is 0 or more and less than 100, the variation added to the "number of remaining ART games" x in one frame when calculated by the above (Equation 5). The value will be "0". Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "number of additional games of the remaining ART" y is 0 or more and less than 100, the fluctuation value is set to "1". Therefore, when the "number of additional games of ART remaining" y is less than 200, the "number of additional games of ART" x'is added by 30 games per second.

If a special notification such as a bonus prize is required during the additional notification effect, the additional notification effect is stopped, and after the special notification such as the end of the bonus is completed, the additional notification effect is restarted. That is, when a special notification is required during the additional notification effect, the count-up display is temporarily stopped, and after the special notification is completed, the count-up display is restarted.

For example, when the number of additional games of ART is determined and only the sum of the determined number of additional games of ART and the number of remaining ART games is displayed, the uplifting feeling that the number of additional ART games has been added cannot be maintained. On the other hand, when the number of additional games of ART is determined, when the number of remaining ART games is increased by the count-up display, if the speed of increase is constant, it is proportional to the determined number of additional games of ART. The time required for the count-up display becomes longer. As a result, the time for performing other effects is reduced, or the other effects are started during the count-up display, which hinders the effects of the other effects.

In the additional notification effect of the present embodiment, when the "remaining number of ART games" x is less than a predetermined value (for example, when it is 10), the variable value added to the "remaining number of ART games" x in one frame is It becomes "17". When the "remaining number of ART games" x is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, when it is 27), the fluctuation value added to the "remaining number of ART games" x in one frame is "16". Therefore, when the value of the count-up display is less than the predetermined value, the fluctuation value is larger than that when the value of the count-up display is equal to or more than the predetermined value, so that the value increases at a high speed.

Therefore, in the count-up display, the speed at which the numerical value increases can be changed stepwise, and the time required for the additional notification effect can be adjusted. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect in which the uplifting feeling that the number of ART games is added is maintained, and it is possible to prevent the effect of other effects from being hindered, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation value when "the number of additional games of the remaining ART" is y is set to y / 100. However, as the additional notification effect according to the present invention, an expression for calculating the fluctuation value can be arbitrarily set. Further, the formula for calculating the fluctuation value is not limited to one, and may be changed according to a condition (for example, the value of "the number of additional games of the remaining ART").

Further, in the present embodiment, when the value of the count-up display is less than the predetermined value, the speed at which the numerical value increases is faster than when the value of the count-up display is equal to or more than the predetermined value. However, as the additional notification effect according to the present invention, when the value of the count-up display is less than the predetermined value, the speed at which the numerical value increases is slower than when the value of the count-up display is equal to or more than the predetermined value. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the speed at which the numerical value increases is the slowest, the fluctuation value added to the "remaining number of ART games" x in one frame is set to "1". As described above, in the present embodiment, 30 games are added per second in order to display an image of 30 frames per second. However, as the additional notification effect according to the present invention, for example, when the "number of additional games of the remaining ART" y is 10 or less, one game may be added per second.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the value obtained by adding the number of additional ART games to the remaining number of ART games is notified, the additional notification effect is performed. However, the additional notification effect according to the present invention is not limited to the notification related to the number of ART games, and for example, the value obtained by adding the determined number of game media to the remaining number of game media is notified. May be good. Further, if the set of ART is continued, the value obtained by adding the number of game media acquired in the current ART to the number of game media acquired in the ART that has been continued so far may be notified.

Further, as the additional notification effect according to the present invention, for example, the current number of remaining ART games or the remaining number of game media to be granted at the time of returning after displaying the menu screen during ART or at the time of returning from power failure. It may be executed when displaying. In this case, the first value according to the present invention becomes 0, and the second value and the total value according to the present invention become the number of ART games or the number of remaining gaming media to be granted.

Further, in the present embodiment, one value (the number of remaining ART games) is displayed in a count-up display. However, as the additional notification effect according to the present invention, a count-up display may be performed for a plurality of items. For example, the number of game media granted in the current ART, the total number of game media granted in the ART continued until the current ART, and the number of continuous ARTs may be notified by count-up display.

In that case, the speed at which the numerical value increases can be set according to the items to be displayed. For example, each count-up display may be set to end at the same time. Further, by extremely slowing the speed at which the numerical value in the count-up display increases only for the item to be emphasized, it is possible to give a strong impression to the count-up display of the item to be emphasized.

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing a first modification of the additional notification effect.
In the first modification of the additional notification effect, the count-up is paused in the middle of the count-up display, and then the count-up is restarted.

As shown in FIG. 170, when the first modification of the additional notification effect is started, the determined "number of additional ART games" and "number of remaining ART games" are displayed on the display unit 11a. Then, a count-up display is performed in which the numerical value of the "remaining ART games" is increased from the "remaining ART games" to the "remaining ART games after the addition". At this time, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the fluctuation value is calculated according to the "number of additional games of the remaining ART", and the speed at which the value increases is gradually slowed down.

Then, when the "remaining number of ART games" approaches a specific value, the speed at which the value increases is further slowed down. For example, when the specific value is set to "1000" and the "remaining number of ART games" reaches "990", the speed at which the numerical value increases is extremely slowed down, and the "remaining number of ART games" becomes ". When it reaches "1000", the count-up is paused. After that, as in the above-described embodiment, the fluctuation value is calculated according to the "number of additional games of the remaining ART", and the speed at which the value increases is gradually slowed down.

In the first modification of the additional notification effect, it is possible to make a more strongly impressing situation for the player, which is very pleased for the player that the "remaining number of ART games" has reached 1000 in four digits. Therefore, as the specific value according to the first modification, a numerical value such as 100 or 500, which is a guideline for the player, is preferable.

Further, when the "remaining number of ART games" reaches a specific value, sound effects may be output from the speakers 20L and 20R. This makes it possible to effectively impress a situation that is pleasing to the technician. Further, when the "remaining number of ART games" reaches a specific value and the count-up is paused, the characters "shutter chance!" Prompting the player to take a picture may be displayed. As a result, the satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.

Further, the specific value according to the first modification may be a value that suggests or notifies the player of the current situation, and may be set to, for example, 456, 777, or the like. For example, when the specific value is set to 456, it is suggested or notified that the set value is any of 4, 5, or 6, and when the specific value is set to 777, it is suggested or notified that the bonus is won. Notify.

FIG. 171 is an explanatory diagram showing a second modification of the additional notification effect.
The second variant of the additional notification effect is a limiter function that ends ART when the number of ART games digested after starting ART reaches a predetermined number (limiter value) in order to suppress excessive gambling. Applies to the game machine you have.

As shown in FIG. 171, in the second modification, the predetermined number is set to 1500, and when the number of ART games digested after starting ART reaches 1500, ART is ended. For example, suppose that the number of digested ART games is 100, the number of remaining ART games is 1000, and the number of determined ART additional games is 600.

The total value of the number of digested ART games, the number of remaining ART games, and the determined number of additional ART games is 1700. Here, even if the above-mentioned additional notification effect is performed and 1600 is notified as the number of remaining ART games after the addition, if the number of additional ART games is not determined thereafter, the number of remaining ART games becomes 200. At that time, ART ends. As a result, the player will be aware that the number of ART games of 200 has been truncated by the limiter function, and the player will feel a loss.

Therefore, in the second modification, when the total value of the number of digested ART games, the number of remaining ART games, and the determined number of ART additional games exceeds a predetermined number, the number of ART additional games is calculated. The number of games is corrected so that it does not exceed the predetermined number and displayed (notified). In the above example, 400 is displayed instead of 600 as the determined number of additional games of ART. In this case, the fluctuation value is calculated with the "number of additional games of ART remaining" as 400, and the speed at which the value increases is gradually slowed down.

In this way, even if a value smaller than the determined number of ART additional games is displayed, the player does not know the number of ART additional games determined to be implemented, so that the number of ART games has been truncated. It can be prevented from being recognized by. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the loss.

In the second modification, the number of ART games was used as a condition for activating the limiter function. However, the conditions for activating the limiter function are, for example, the number of games in which the bonus is operating, the number of games from the bonus winning to the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus (so-called inside the bonus or between flags), and the ART. You may set the total number of games, which is the sum of the number of games and the number of games in the bonus. Further, the condition for activating the limiter function may be set based on the net increase number or the number of payouts of the game medium in ART instead of the number of games.

(8) Finger Touch Effect Next, a finger touch effect performed using the touch input unit 331a will be described.
In the present embodiment, the finger touch effect is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Predetermined conditions include, for example, the case where a predetermined number of games are exhausted after the ART is completed, the case where it is decided to execute the finger touch effect by lottery, and the like.

When the finger touch effect is executed, an image in which the girl puts out her index finger is displayed on the display unit 11a. The index finger in the image in which the girl puts out the index finger is displayed in a predetermined area on the display unit 11a. The index finger of the girl displayed in the predetermined area shows a specific example of the touch operation object according to the present invention.

When the image of the girl pointing her index finger is displayed on the display unit 11a, the words "touch" are output from the speakers 20L and 20R. When the player performs a long tap operation on the predetermined area where the index finger of the girl is displayed and 5 seconds have passed, the words "It's okay" are output from the speakers 20L and 20R. Outputting the words "I'm good" from the speakers 20L and 20R shows a specific example of the first response effect according to the present invention, and 5 seconds is a specific example of the first period according to the present invention. Shown.

As the first response effect, an effect that suggests the end of the operation of touching the predetermined area (touch operation) is preferable. If the player finishes the long tap operation before 10 seconds have passed after the words "It's okay" are output from the speakers 20L and 20R, the finger touch effect ends. This 10 seconds shows a specific example of the second period according to the present invention.

On the other hand, if the long tap operation is continued until 10 seconds have passed after the line "It's okay" is output from the speakers 20L and 20R, an image that the girl holding the index finger is embarrassed is displayed. The matching lines are output from the speakers 20L and 20R. Outputting an image in which a girl holding her index finger is shy and a line matching the image from the speakers 20L and 20R shows a specific example of the second response effect according to the present invention.

It is a mission (problem) for the player who has started the above-mentioned Unimemo to make the second response effect appear. Therefore, when the second response effect is made to appear, the mission of Unimemo is cleared, and the privilege when the finger touch effect is cleared is given. As a privilege at the time of clearing the finger touch effect, for example, an image of a character related to the game machine is given to the player who has started the above-mentioned Unimemo, and the costume of the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 can be changed. That can be mentioned.

The privilege at the time of clearing the finger touch effect according to the present invention is not limited to the one given to the player who has started Unimemo, and may be given to all the players. As a privilege at the time of clearing the finger touch effect according to the present invention, for example, the types of music (BGM) that can be output during the first ART or the second ART may be increased. The privilege at the time of clearing the finger touch effect is preferably a privilege that does not affect the game result of the pachislot machine 1, but is not limited to this, and for example, the above-mentioned causal value may be given.

In the finger touch effect, a long tap operation is performed on the predetermined area where the index finger of the girl is displayed, and after 5 seconds (first period) elapses, a line saying "It's okay" is output from the speakers 20L and 20R (first). Response effect is executed). If the long tap operation is not continued until another 10 seconds (second period) elapses, an image in which the girl holding the index finger is embarrassed is displayed, and the corresponding lines are output from the speakers 20L and 20R. (The second response effect is executed).

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the second response effect, and it is possible to give the player who has discovered the second response effect a sense of superiority. Then, it is possible to stimulate the quest for the production using the touch sensor module and improve the interest of the production using the touch sensor module.

Further, in the first response effect, it is suggested that the operation of touching the predetermined area (touch operation) is completed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to find the second response effect, to marvel at the player who has discovered the second response effect, and to enhance the interest of the effect using the touch sensor module.

In the present embodiment, the first response effect is an effect that suggests the end of the operation (touch operation) of touching the predetermined area with a finger. However, the first response effect according to the present invention is not limited to the effect suggesting the end of the finger touch operation (touch operation). For example, when the execution of the finger touch effect reaches a predetermined number of times after the start of the uni-memo, the effect may be changed to suggest the second response effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first period is set to 5 seconds and the second period is set to 10 seconds. However, the first period and the second period according to the present invention can be set to any period. The second period is preferably equal to or longer than the first period. In this case, it becomes difficult to find the second response effect, and the rarity value of discovering the second response effect can be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, the image of the index finger of the girl is adopted as the touch operation object, but any image can be adopted as the touch operation object according to the present invention. Further, in the present embodiment, one predetermined area for detecting the touch input information is provided, but two or more predetermined areas for detecting the touch input information according to the present invention may be provided.

When two or more predetermined areas for detecting the touch input information are provided, the second response effect may be executed if the touch input information is continuously detected in at least one of the predetermined areas. In this case, even if the long tap operation (touch operation) is continued, an area where the second response effect is not executed can be provided, and the rarity value of discovering the second response effect is further increased, and the finger touch effect is produced. Can improve the interest of.

The gaming machines according to the first to third embodiments of the present invention have been described above, including their effects. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described here, and it goes without saying that the present invention includes various embodiments as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

For example, in the above embodiment, when the "bonus win" is determined by the bonus lottery, any one of "SBB", "BB" and "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery. However, as the game machine of the present invention, either "SBB or BB" or "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery, and either "SBB" or "BB" is determined at the end of the precursory game. You may.

Further, in the above embodiment, the "BB precursor flag" is turned on when the precursor game of "SBB" or "BB" is being played. That is, the operating state of the precursor game of "SBB" and "BB" is managed by the "BB precursor flag". However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured to provide the precursor flag for "SBB" and the precursor flag for "BB" separately from each other. In this case, the production of the precursor game corresponding to "SBB" and the production of the precursor game corresponding to "BB" may be different from each other.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first ART (“SBB”, “BB”, “RB”) and the second ART are terminated on the condition that the games of the number of staying games have been digested. However, the first ART and the second ART according to the present invention may be configured to end on the condition that the navigation (notification of display auxiliary information) is performed a predetermined number of times.

Further, in the above embodiment, the number of staying games of "SBB" in the first ART is fixed to "100". However, as with the "BB", the "SBB" according to the present invention may have a configuration in which the number of games to be added to the number of staying games is added (added) to the number of staying games in the "SBB".

Further, in the above embodiment, the number of games for producing the additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in BR is fixed to "2". That is, when the effects of the additional additions A, B, and C are determined, "2" is set in the additional addition game number counter. However, the number of games for producing the additional additions A, B, and C according to the present invention may be variable. For example, the value set in the additional game number counter may be different depending on the type of the additional additional effect (additional additions A, B, C).

In the above various embodiments and various modifications, for example, lottery processing (for example, internal lottery processing, etc.) and control processing related to the progress of the game are performed on the main control board 41 (main control unit), and are related to effect control. Although the example in which the lottery process (for example, AT lottery process, etc.) and the control process are performed on the sub-control board 42 (sub-control unit) is described, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, some or all of the various lottery processes and various control processes performed on the sub-control board 42 in the above various embodiments and various modifications may be performed on the main control board 41. Further, for example, a part or all of various lottery processes and various control processes performed on the main control board 41 in the above various embodiments and various modifications may be performed on the sub control board 42.

Further, in the above-mentioned various embodiments and various modifications, the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination that is the end condition during preparation and the combination of symbols corresponding to the small combination in BB, RB, and ART are stopped and displayed. The sequence navigation was notified by the liquid crystal display device 11. That is, the instruction information which is the information which causes a clear difference in the acquisition performance of the game medium and is the information which can identify the reel (stop button) pressing order and the pressing position (the symbol position to display the stop) of a specific reel. The liquid crystal display device 11 controlled by the sub-control circuit 101 notified.

However, as the gaming machine according to the present invention, the device controlled by the main control circuit may notify the above instruction information. Examples of the device controlled by the main control circuit include the 7-segment display 23 (see FIG. 7) described above, but a dedicated instruction monitor for notifying the instruction information may also be used. Further, the instruction information may be performed by both the liquid crystal display device 11 controlled by the sub control circuit 101 and the device controlled by the main control circuit.

<Supplementary note (summary of the present invention)>
[1st to 7th game machines]
A typical gaming machine includes a cabinet and a front door that can be opened and closed from the cabinet. The front door is provided with a plurality of effect devices such as a lamp unit, a speaker, a display device, and a touch sensor module. A coordinate detection device is known as a touch sensor module (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-277047).

The touch sensor module mounted on the game machine is provided, for example, on the display unit of the display device. In a game machine equipped with such a touch sensor module, the player can directly touch the display unit of the display device to perform an intuitive input operation, which is expected to enhance the interest of the production. Further, by adopting the surface type capacitance method as the touch sensor module, an input device using the touch sensor can be manufactured at low cost with a simple configuration.

As a game machine equipped with a touch sensor module, there is known a game machine in which when a position where a player touches is detected by the touch sensor module, the effect content is determined based on the detected position (for example,). See JP-A-2009-261605). In the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-261605, it is possible to select the effect to be performed in the following games by contacting the desired selected images during the period when a plurality of selected images are displayed. it can.

However, there is room for improvement in the production using the touch sensor module, and it is desired to improve the interest of the production using the touch sensor module.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned first problem, and the first object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of improving the interest of production using a touch sensor module. is there.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
A touch sensor module that is provided so as to overlap at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information.
An effect device (for example, speakers 20L and 20R described later) provided separately from the display device is provided.
A first display object (for example, an animal image 351 described later) is displayed in a first region in the display unit superimposed on the touch sensor module of the display device, and the inside of the display unit overlapped with the touch sensor module of the display device. In the production of displaying the second display object (for example, the image 352 of a girl described later) in the second area of
It is decided whether or not to execute the response effect (for example, the dialogue effect described later) for each area.
After that, when the touch input information corresponding to the area determined to execute the response effect is detected, at least one of the display device and the effect device executes the response effect.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in determining whether or not to execute the response effect, the ratio of determining that the response effect is to be executed differs between the first region and the second region.

Further, the present invention provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
A touch sensor module (for example, a touch sensor module 31 described later) that is provided so as to overlap at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information.
An effect device (for example, a touch sensor module 31 described later) provided separately from the display device is provided.
A first display object (for example, an animal image 351 described later) is displayed in a first region in the display unit superimposed on the touch sensor module of the display device, and the inside of the display unit overlapped with the touch sensor module of the display device. In the production of the second display object (for example, the image 352 of a girl described later) in the second area of
When the touch input information corresponding to the first region and the second region is detected, a response effect by at least one of the display device and the effect device (for example, a video effect in which the animal image 351 described later operates) ) Is feasible,
As the response effect, there is a specific response effect (for example, a video effect in which an animal image 351 described later operates and a dialogue effect that outputs dialogue) that are executed by both the display device and the production device.
When the touch input information corresponding to the first region is detected and when the touch input information corresponding to the second region is detected, the ratio at which the specific response effect is determined is different. A game machine characterized by that.

Further, the present invention provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
A touch sensor module (for example, a touch sensor module 31 described later) that is provided so as to overlap at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information.
An effect device (for example, a touch sensor module 31 described later) provided separately from the display device is provided.
A first display object (for example, an animal image 351 described later) is displayed in a first region in the display unit superimposed on the touch sensor module of the display device, and the inside of the display unit overlapped with the touch sensor module of the display device. In the production of the second display object (for example, the image 352 of a girl described later) in the second area of
When the touch input information corresponding to the first region and the second region is detected, a response effect by at least one of the display device and the effect device (for example, a video effect in which the animal image 351 described later operates) ) Is feasible,
As the response effect, there is a specific response effect (for example, a video effect in which an animal image 351 described later operates and a dialogue effect that outputs dialogue) that are executed by both the display device and the production device.
When the touch input information corresponding to the first region is detected and when the touch input information corresponding to the second region is detected, the ratio at which the specific response effect is determined is different. A game machine characterized by that.

In the first gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, a response effect is performed when the touch input information corresponding to the first area is detected and when the touch input information corresponding to the second area is detected. The rate at which is determined is different. As a result, the player can select the frequency at which the response effect is performed, and the interest of the effect using the touch sensor module can be improved.

Further, in order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a second gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
A touch sensor module that is provided so as to overlap at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information.
It is a game machine equipped with
Touch coordinates are acquired based on the touch input information detected by the touch sensor module, a predetermined image (for example, a black haze image 354 described later) is displayed in a predetermined area including the touch coordinates, and goal coordinates (for example, a black haze image 354 described later) are displayed. For example, the angle of the line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates with respect to a line substantially perpendicular to one side of the display unit (for example, the upper side of the display unit 11a described later) near the center of the decoration unit 321 described later. Is calculated, and the game machine is characterized in that the predetermined image advances toward the goal coordinates based on the angle.

In the second gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, no matter which point is touched, an image moving from the touch coordinates to the goal coordinates can be displayed, and the interest of the production using the touch sensor module is improved. Can be made to.

Further, in order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a third gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
A touch sensor module that is provided so as to overlap at least a part of the display unit of the display device and detects touch input information.
It is a game machine equipped with
The touch coordinates are acquired based on the touch input information detected by the touch sensor module, a predetermined image (for example, a black haze image 354 described later) is displayed in a predetermined area including the touch coordinates, and the goal coordinates (for example, a black haze image 354 described later) are displayed. For example, the angle of the line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates with respect to a line substantially perpendicular to one side of the display unit (for example, the upper side of the display unit 11a described later) near the center of the decoration unit 321 described later. Is calculated, and an image in which the predetermined image advances toward the goal coordinates based on the angle is displayed.
The predetermined image is characterized in that it is displayed in a predetermined appearance mode (for example, a mode spreading in a circle described later) in the predetermined area from the detection of the touch input information to the elapse of a predetermined period. Game machine.

In the third gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, no matter which point is touched, an image moving from the touch coordinates toward the goal coordinates can be displayed. In addition, by displaying the predetermined image in a low region including the touch coordinates in a predetermined appearance mode, it is possible to make it appear as if the predetermined image has appeared from the finger, and the interest of the production using the touch sensor module is improved. Can be made to.

Further, in order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a fourth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
A touch sensor module that is provided so as to overlap at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information is provided.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification image (for example, a predetermined notification image 356 described later) is displayed on the display unit, and the touch input information (for example, a pinch-out operation described later) detected by the touch sensor module is displayed. ), The game machine characterized in that the transparency of the predetermined notification image is changed.

In the fourth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, since the transparency of the predetermined notification image changes based on the touch input information, the predetermined notification image can be recognized or cannot be recognized, and the touch can be made. It is possible to improve the interest of the production using the sensor module.

Further, in order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a fifth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
A touch sensor module that is provided so as to overlap at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information.
It is provided with an operation means different from the touch sensor module (for example, a production button 322 described later).
When notifying the player that the privilege is to be given, the touch input information detected by the touch sensor module or the player's operation detected by the operating means is used in a predetermined direction from the initial dimensions. A gaming machine characterized by displaying an expanding expansion image (for example, an expansion target image 371 described later).

In the fifth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, the expanded image can be expanded by performing an operation on the operating means instead of the input operation of touching the display unit. Therefore, the effect using the touch sensor module can be enjoyed without performing the input operation of touching the display unit.

Further, in order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a sixth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
A touch sensor module that is provided so as to overlap at least a part of the display unit of the display device and detects touch input information.
It is provided with an operation means different from the touch sensor module (for example, a production button 322 described later).
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification image (for example, a predetermined notification image 356 described later) is displayed on the display unit, and the touch input information (for example, a pinch-out operation described later) detected by the touch sensor module is displayed. ) Or a gaming machine characterized in that the transparency of the predetermined notification image is changed based on the player's operation (for example, long press described later) detected by the operating means.

In the sixth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, the transparency of the predetermined notification image can be changed by performing an operation on the operating means instead of the input operation of touching the display unit. Therefore, the effect using the touch sensor module can be enjoyed without performing the input operation of touching the display unit.

Further, in order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a seventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
A touch sensor module that is provided so as to overlap at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information.
An effect device (for example, speakers 20L and 20R described later) provided separately from the display device is provided.
A touch operation object (for example, described later) is displayed in a predetermined area in the display unit superimposed on the touch sensor module of the display device, and the touch input information corresponding to the predetermined area is detected until the first period elapses. If this continues, the first response effect is executed by at least one of the display device and the effect device, and after the execution of the first response effect, the touch corresponding to the predetermined area until the second period elapses. A gaming machine characterized in that a second response effect is executed by at least one of the display device and the effect device when the input information continues to be detected.

In the seventh gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the second response effect, and it is possible to give the player who has found the second response effect a sense of superiority. Then, it is possible to stimulate the quest for the production using the touch sensor module and improve the interest of the production using the touch sensor module.

[8th game machine]
As a conventional game machine, there is known a game machine in which when a touch sensor module detects a position in contact with a player, the effect content is determined based on the detected position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-). 261605 (see). In the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-261605, it is possible to select the effect to be performed in the following games by contacting the desired selected images during the period when a plurality of selected images are displayed. it can.

However, the method of selecting the effect as described in Patent Document 1 is simple, and it is difficult to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned second problem, and a second object of the present invention is to improve a method of selecting a production to improve the interest of a game. Is to provide.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides an eighth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
An effect device (for example, speakers 20L and 20R described later) provided separately from the display device, and
It is equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, a touch sensor module described later).
Before the start of the special period (for example, the period from the start to the end of BB described later), a sound effect selection image (for example, BGM described later) for selecting the type of sound effect (for example, BGM described later) is displayed on the display unit. , The BGM selection image 362) described later and the notification effect selection image for selecting the type of notification effect (for example, the notification effect selection image 361 described later) are displayed.
The types of the sound effect and the notification effect can be selected based on the operation of the operation means.
In the special period, when the selected sound effect is output by the effect device and specific conditions (for example, it is decided to perform the chance notification effect described later) are satisfied, the selected notification effect is output. A gaming machine characterized by displaying on the display unit.

In the eighth game machine of the present invention having the above configuration, the player can freely combine the sound effect and the announcement effect by selecting the types of the sound effect and the announcement effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. I can do it.

[9th game machine]
Conventionally, a game called pachislot, which is provided with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols provided on their respective surfaces, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as a medal or coin is inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is rotated. Output a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. To do. The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reels. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a game machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all reels is stopped and the combination of symbols related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the payout of the game medium (medals, etc.) and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of paying out game media can be mentioned.

Further, conventionally, in a game machine having the above configuration, it is known that a display unit for displaying an image is used to notify a player of a game situation (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-30102). The gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-30102 has a function of navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, that is, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) function. .. Then, the effect of notifying the fact that the number of times of navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination has been added by the change of the number displayed on the liquid crystal display device is performed.

However, there is room for further improvement in the effect of notifying the player of the game situation by using the display unit for displaying an image, and an effect of enhancing the visual effect is desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned third problem, and a third object of the present invention is to enhance the visual effect of an effect of notifying a game situation by using a display device, and to enjoy the game. It is to provide a technique capable of suppressing the decrease in the amount of water.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a ninth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) is provided.
When a privilege (for example, the number of additional games of ART described later) is given to the player, an expansion image (for example, an expansion target image 371 described later) that expands in a predetermined direction from the initial dimensions based on the operation of the player is displayed. Displayed on the display unit
The expansion image is a gaming machine characterized in that the expansion rate differs depending on the size or type of privilege given to the player.

In the ninth game machine of the present invention having the above configuration, since the expansion rate of the expansion image differs depending on the size or type of the privilege, it is possible to enhance the visual effect of the effect of notifying the game situation by using the display device. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

[10th and 11th game machines]
A typical gaming machine includes a cabinet and a front door that can be opened and closed from the cabinet. The front door is provided with a plurality of effect devices such as a lamp unit, a speaker, a display device, and a touch sensor module. A coordinate detection device is known as a touch sensor module (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-277047).

The touch sensor module mounted on the game machine is provided, for example, on the display unit of the display device. In a game machine equipped with such a touch sensor module, the player can directly touch the display unit of the display device to perform an intuitive input operation, which is expected to enhance the interest of the production. Further, by adopting the surface type capacitance method as the touch sensor module, an input device using the touch sensor can be manufactured at low cost with a simple configuration.

A gaming machine equipped with a touch sensor module is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-922902. The gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92202 removes scratches such as lottery, in which the "filling" of the part rubbed with a finger disappears and an image notifying the player can be seen from the disappeared part. Perform a production that seems to be.

However, there is room for improvement in the effect of scraping scratches performed by the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-922902, and it is hoped that the effect of scraping scratches will be improved. It is rare.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned fourth problem, and a fourth object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of improving the interest of a production such as scratching. Is.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a tenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
A touch sensor module that is provided so as to overlap at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information is provided.
When special conditions (for example, when the winning of CZ described later is decided, or when the winning of CZ is not decided and it is decided to execute the scratch effect by lottery) are satisfied. A shield image (for example, four shield images 381a to 381d described later) is displayed in the display unit superimposed on the touch sensor module.
Based on the player touching a predetermined area of the touch sensor module corresponding to the shielded image, at least a part of the shielded image is changed to the reduced visibility mode, and the reduced visibility mode is obtained. At least a part of a predetermined effect image (for example, "this" or "x" described later) can be visually recognized from the place.
When the player touches the predetermined area, the area in which at least a part of the shielded image can be changed to the visibility reduction mode is the first area centered on the touch coordinates (for example, the first area described later). It is divided into a region 382a) and a second region (for example, a second region 382b described later) that is farther from the center of the touch coordinates than the first region.
The first region is a gaming machine characterized in that the efficiency of lowering the visibility of the shielded image is higher than that of the second region.

In the tenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, the farther away from the touched point, the less likely it is that the visibility is lowered, and the reality of the effect of scraping scratches can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the production as if scratching.

Further, in order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides an eleventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
A touch sensor module that is provided so as to overlap at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information is provided.
When special conditions (for example, when the winning of CZ described later is decided, or when the winning of CZ is not decided and it is decided to execute the scratch effect by lottery) are satisfied. A shield image (for example, four shield images 381a to 381d described later) is displayed in the display unit superimposed on the touch sensor module.
Based on the player touching a predetermined area of the touch sensor module corresponding to the shielded image, at least a part of the shielded image is changed to the reduced visibility mode, and the reduced visibility mode is obtained. At least a part of a predetermined effect image (for example, "this" or "x" described later) can be visually recognized from the place.
It has a touch mode management means (for example, a sub-control board 77 described later) that performs touch mode management including a first touch mode and a second touch mode having different efficiencies in reducing the visibility of the shielded image.
When the player performs a special operation (for example, a pinch-out operation described later) when the special condition is satisfied, the touch mode management means changes from the first touch mode to the second touch mode. A game machine characterized by that.

In the eleventh gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, the efficiency of reducing the visibility of the shielded image can be changed by the player performing a special operation. As a result, the shielded image can be easily changed to a mode in which visibility is lowered, and the interest of the effect of scraping scratches can be improved.

[12th game machine]
Conventionally, a game called pachislot, which is provided with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols provided on their respective surfaces, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as a medal or coin is inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is rotated. Output a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. To do. The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reels. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a game machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all reels is stopped and the combination of symbols related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the payout of the game medium (medals, etc.) and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of paying out game media can be mentioned.

Further, conventionally, in a game machine having the above configuration, it is known that a display unit for displaying an image is used to notify a player of a game situation (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-30102). The gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-30102 has a function of navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, that is, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) function. .. Then, the effect of notifying the fact that the number of times of navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination has been added by the change of the number displayed on the liquid crystal display device is performed.

However, there is room for further improvement in the effect of notifying the player of the game situation by using the display unit that displays an image, and it is desired to enhance the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned fifth problem, and a fifth object of the present invention is to improve the effect of notifying the game situation by using a display device to enhance the interest of the game. Is to provide the technology that is possible.

In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides a twelfth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) is provided.
The display device notifies that the first value (for example, "the number of additional games of ART" described later) is added to the second value (for example, "the number of remaining ART games" described later). Display and
The addition notification display is a count-up display that increases the numerical value until the total value obtained by adding the first value to the second value (for example, "the number of remaining ART games after addition" described later) is reached. And
The speed at which the numerical value of the count-up display increases is such that the remaining value obtained by subtracting the amount already added to the first value from the second value is less than a predetermined value (for example, the "remaining number of ART games" described later is 10). ) And the case where the remaining value is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, the “remaining number of ART games” described later is 27).

In the twelfth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, by changing the speed at which the numerical value in the count-up display increases, it is possible to realize an effect that gives an uplifting feeling and to adjust the time required for the effect. Can enhance the interest of.

1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4L ... Left display window, 4C ... Middle display window, 4R ... right display window, 11 ... liquid crystal display device, 16 ... start lever, 17L ... left stop button, 17C ... middle stop button, 17R ... right stop button, 41 ... main control board, 42 ... sub control board, 93 ... main CPU , 102 ... Sub CPU

Claims (1)

Equipped with a display device having a display unit
When a privilege is given to the player, it is possible to execute an expansion effect of displaying an expansion image that expands in a predetermined direction from the initial dimension on the display unit based on the operation of the player.
The expansion image is a gaming machine characterized in that the expansion rate differs depending on the size or type of privilege given to the player , and the expansion direction can be selected by the player.